Skip to content
Subjects

A-Level Chemistry

  • 1 Atomic structure
    1.1

    What an atom is made of

    Syllabus
    1. understand that atoms are mostly empty space surrounding a very small, dense nucleus that contains protons and neutrons; electrons are found in shells in the empty space around the nucleus
    2. identify and describe protons, neutrons and electrons in terms of their relative charges and relative masses
    3. understand the terms atomic and proton number; mass and nucleon number
    4. describe the distribution of mass and charge within an atom
    5. describe the behaviour of beams of protons, neutrons and electrons moving at the same velocity in an electric field
    6. determine the numbers of protons, neutrons and electrons present in both atoms and ions given atomic or proton number, mass or nucleon number and charge
    7. state and explain qualitatively the variations in atomic radius and ionic radius across a period and down a group

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A scanning tunnelling microscope image of atoms
    A scanning tunnelling microscope can image individual atoms.

    Everything is made of atoms 原子. An atom is mostly empty space. At its centre is a tiny, heavy nucleus 原子核. The nucleus holds two kinds of particle: protons 质子 and neutrons 中子. Around the nucleus, in the empty space, move the electrons 电子. The electrons stay in shells 壳层 — layers at set distances from the nucleus.

    The nucleus is very small but holds almost all the mass. The electrons take up almost all the space but have almost no mass.

    An atom with a central nucleus of protons and neutrons, surrounded by electrons in two shells
    An atom is mostly empty space: protons and neutrons sit in the tiny central nucleus, while electrons move in shells around it

    Relative charge and relative mass

    We compare the three particles using relative charge 相对电荷 and relative mass 相对质量. These are simple numbers, not real units.

    Particle Relative charge Relative mass
    proton $+1$ $1$
    neutron $0$ $1$
    electron $-1$ $\tfrac{1}{1836}$ (about $0$)

    A proton and a neutron have almost the same mass. An electron is about 1836 times lighter. The proton is positive, the electron is negative, and the neutron has no charge — it is neutral 中性.

    Proton number and nucleon number

    Two numbers describe the nucleus:

    • the proton number 质子数 (also called the atomic number 原子序数), symbol $Z$ — the number of protons.
    • the nucleon number 核子数 (also called the mass number 质量数), symbol $A$ — the total number of protons and neutrons. Protons and neutrons are both nucleons 核子.

    So the number of neutrons is $A - Z$.

    Counting particles in an atom or ion

    For a neutral atom, the number of electrons equals the number of protons, which equals $Z$.

    An ion 离子 is an atom that has lost or gained electrons, so it has a charge:

    • a positive ion has fewer electrons than protons.
    • a negative ion has more electrons than protons.

    Example: $^{27}_{13}\text{Al}^{3+}$ has $13$ protons, $27 - 13 = 14$ neutrons, and $13 - 3 = 10$ electrons (it lost 3 electrons to become $3+$).

    How mass and charge are spread out

    Almost all the mass sits in the nucleus, because protons and neutrons are heavy and electrons are very light. All the positive charge is in the nucleus (the protons). The negative charge is spread out in the shells (the electrons).

    Beams of particles in an electric field

    Imagine beams of protons, neutrons and electrons moving at the same speed into an electric field 电场 between two charged plates:

    • the proton beam bends towards the negative plate (protons are positive).
    • the electron beam bends the other way, towards the positive plate. It bends much more, because the electron is far lighter — the same force gives a bigger deflection 偏转 to a smaller mass.
    • the neutron beam goes straight through. It has no charge, so the field gives it no force.
    Three beams between charged plates: the electron bends sharply to the positive plate, the proton bends gently to the negative plate, the neutron goes straight
    In an electric field the proton bends towards the $-$ plate and the electron bends the opposite way and far more (it is much lighter); the neutron passes straight through

    Atomic radius and ionic radius

    The atomic radius 原子半径 is the size of an atom. The ionic radius 离子半径 is the size of an ion.

    Across a period 周期 (left to right), the atomic radius gets smaller. The nuclear charge 核电荷 (the pull from the protons) rises, but the electrons go into the same outer shell, so the shielding 屏蔽 by inner shells stays about the same. The stronger pull draws the outer shell inwards.

    Down a group (top to bottom), the atomic radius gets larger. Each step down adds a new shell, so the outer electrons are further out and feel more shielding from the nucleus.

    A row of atoms getting smaller across a period, and a column of atoms getting larger down a group
    Across a period the atoms shrink (stronger nuclear pull on the same outer shell); down a group they grow (each step adds a shell)

    For ions:

    • a positive ion (cation 阳离子) is smaller than its atom. It has lost its outer shell, and the electrons that remain feel a stronger pull each.
    • a negative ion (anion 阴离子) is larger than its atom. It has gained electrons, so there is more repulsion 排斥 between the electrons.
    • among ions that have the same number of electrons, the one with more protons is smaller.
    Explore

    Explore the atom

    Tap each part. A tiny dense nucleus of protons and neutrons holds the mass; light electrons orbit it in shells.

    Explore

    Atomic and ionic radius trends

    Atomic radius falls across a period (rising nuclear charge pulls the same shell in) and rises down a group (an extra shell each time). Step across Period 3 to see it.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    atom 原子 yuán zi
    nucleus 原子核 yuán zǐ hé
    proton 质子 zhì zi
    neutron 中子 zhōng zi
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    shell 壳层 ké céng
    relative charge 相对电荷 xiāng duì diàn hè
    relative mass 相对质量 xiāng duì zhì liàng
    neutral 中性 zhōng xìng
    proton number 质子数 zhì zi shù
    atomic number 原子序数 yuán zi xù shù
    nucleon number 核子数 hé zǐ shù
    mass number 质量数 zhì liàng shù
    nucleon 核子 hé zǐ
    ion 离子 lí zi
    electric field 电场 diàn chǎng
    deflection 偏转 piān zhuǎn
    atomic radius 原子半径 yuán zi bàn jìng
    ionic radius 离子半径 lí zi bàn jìng
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    nuclear charge 核电荷 hé diàn hè
    shielding 屏蔽 píng bì
    group
    cation 阳离子 yáng lí zi
    anion 阴离子 yīn lí zi
    repulsion 排斥 pái chì
    1.2

    Isotopes

    Syllabus
    1. define the term isotope in terms of numbers of protons and neutrons
    2. understand the notation $_y^x\text{A}$ for isotopes, where $x$ is the mass or nucleon number and $y$ is the atomic or proton number
    3. state that and explain why isotopes of the same element have the same chemical properties
    4. state that and explain why isotopes of the same element have different physical properties, limited to mass and density

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Isotopes 同位素 are atoms of the same element with the same number of protons but a different number of neutrons. So isotopes have the same proton number $Z$ but a different nucleon number $A$.

    Two chlorine isotopes — both have 17 protons but one has 18 neutrons and the other 20
    Two chlorine isotopes: same protons, different neutrons

    We write an isotope as $^{A}_{Z}\text{X}$: the nucleon number $A$ on top, the proton number $Z$ below. For example, chlorine has two main isotopes, $^{35}_{17}\text{Cl}$ and $^{37}_{17}\text{Cl}$.

    Same chemical properties

    Chemical properties 化学性质 depend on the electrons, especially the outer electrons. Isotopes of one element have the same number of electrons arranged in the same way. So they react in exactly the same way — they have the same chemical properties.

    Different physical properties

    Some physical properties 物理性质 depend on mass, so they differ between isotopes. A heavier isotope has more neutrons, so more mass, and therefore a higher density 密度. (The syllabus limits this difference to mass and density.)

    Explore

    Isotope lab

    Classify isotope facts by what changes and what stays the same.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    isotope 同位素 tóng wèi sù
    chemical properties 化学性质 huà xué xìng zhì
    physical properties 物理性质 wù lǐ xìng zhì
    density 密度 mì dù
    1.3

    Electrons, energy levels and orbitals

    Syllabus
    1. understand the terms: shells, sub-shells and orbitals; principal quantum number (n); ground state, limited to electronic configuration
    2. describe the number of orbitals making up s, p and d sub-shells, and the number of electrons that can fill s, p and d sub-shells
    3. describe the order of increasing energy of the sub-shells within the first three shells and the 4s and 4p sub-shells
    4. describe the electronic configurations to include the number of electrons in each shell, sub-shell and orbital
    5. explain the electronic configurations in terms of energy of the electrons and inter-electron repulsion
    6. determine the electronic configuration of atoms and ions given the atomic or proton number and charge, using either of the following conventions: e.g. for Fe: $1\text{s}^2 2\text{s}^2 2\text{p}^6 3\text{s}^2 3\text{p}^6 3\text{d}^6 4\text{s}^2$ (full electronic configuration) or [Ar] $3\text{d}^6 4\text{s}^2$ (shorthand electronic configuration)
    7. understand and use the electrons in boxes notation
    8. describe and sketch the shapes of s and p orbitals
    9. describe a free radical as a species with one or more unpaired electrons

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The visible emission spectrum of hydrogen: four bright lines on black
    Hydrogen emits light only at discrete, characteristic wavelengths — its line emission spectrum.

    Electrons are arranged in shells, sub-shells and orbitals.

    Shells and the principal quantum number

    Each shell is labelled by the principal quantum number 主量子数 $n = 1, 2, 3, \dots$ A larger $n$ means a shell that is further from the nucleus and higher in energy.

    Sub-shells and orbitals

    Each shell is split into sub-shells 亚层, named s, p and d. Each sub-shell is built from orbitals 轨道. An orbital is a small region that can hold up to two electrons.

    Sub-shell Number of orbitals Maximum electrons
    s 1 2
    p 3 6
    d 5 10

    So an s sub-shell holds 2 electrons, a p sub-shell holds 6, and a d sub-shell holds 10.

    Order of increasing energy

    Electrons fill the lowest-energy sub-shell first. For the first three shells, plus 4s and 4p, the order of rising energy is:

    $$1\text{s} < 2\text{s} < 2\text{p} < 3\text{s} < 3\text{p} < 4\text{s} < 3\text{d} < 4\text{p}$$

    Notice the surprise: 4s is slightly lower in energy than 3d, so 4s fills first.

    An energy-level diagram of the sub-shells from 1s up to 4p, with 4s drawn just below 3d
    The sub-shells in order of increasing energy. 4s lies just below 3d, so 4s fills first

    Electronic configuration

    The electronic configuration 电子排布 lists how many electrons are in each sub-shell. The lowest-energy arrangement is the ground state 基态.

    For iron (Fe, $Z = 26$):

    $$1\text{s}^2\,2\text{s}^2\,2\text{p}^6\,3\text{s}^2\,3\text{p}^6\,3\text{d}^6\,4\text{s}^2$$

    You can write a shorthand using the nearest noble gas 稀有气体 in square brackets:

    $$[\text{Ar}]\,3\text{d}^6\,4\text{s}^2$$

    Here $[\text{Ar}]$ stands for the full configuration of argon.

    For ions, you add or remove electrons. One key rule: when a transition metal forms a positive ion, it loses its 4s electrons before its 3d electrons. So $\text{Fe}^{3+}$ is $[\text{Ar}]\,3\text{d}^5$.

    Electrons in boxes

    The electrons in boxes notation draws each orbital as a box and each electron as an arrow. Two electrons in the same orbital must point opposite ways, because each electron has a property called spin 自旋, and a shared orbital needs opposite spins.

    Within a sub-shell, electrons fill empty orbitals one at a time, with parallel arrows, before any orbital gets a second electron. Spreading out like this keeps the electrons apart and lowers the repulsion between them.

    Box diagram for nitrogen: filled 1s and 2s boxes with paired opposite arrows, and three 2p boxes each with one upward arrow
    Electrons in boxes for nitrogen ($1\text{s}^2\,2\text{s}^2\,2\text{p}^3$): paired electrons point opposite ways, and the 2p orbitals fill singly with parallel spins

    Why the configuration takes this shape

    Electrons fill from low energy to high energy because that gives the most stable (lowest-energy) atom. Within a sub-shell they spread out singly first to reduce the repulsion between the negative electrons.

    Shapes of s and p orbitals

    • an s orbital is a sphere 球形 centred on the nucleus.
    • a p orbital has two lobes, like a dumbbell, pointing along one axis. The three p orbitals point along three directions at right angles (the $x$, $y$ and $z$ axes).
    On the left a spherical s orbital with the nucleus at its centre; on the right three dumbbell-shaped p orbitals pointing along the x, y and z axes
    An s orbital is a sphere; each p orbital is a dumbbell, and the three p orbitals point along the $x$, $y$ and $z$ axes

    Free radicals

    A free radical 自由基 is a species with one or more unpaired electrons 未成对电子. Free radicals are very reactive.

    Explore

    Filling the electron shells

    Change the atomic number Z and watch the electrons fill the shells (2, 8, 8, …) — the pattern that builds the Periodic Table.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    principal quantum number 主量子数 zhǔ liàng zǐ shù
    sub-shell 亚层 yà céng
    orbital 轨道 guǐ dào
    electronic configuration 电子排布 diàn zi pái bù
    ground state 基态 jī tài
    noble gas 稀有气体 xī yǒu qì tǐ
    spin 自旋 zì xuán
    sphere 球形 qiú xíng
    free radical 自由基 zì yóu jī
    unpaired electrons 未成对电子 wèi chéng duì diàn zi
    Exercise sheet
    1.4

    Ionisation energy

    Syllabus
    1. define and use the term first ionisation energy, IE
    2. construct equations to represent first, second and subsequent ionisation energies
    3. identify and explain the trends in ionisation energies across a period and down a group of the Periodic Table
    4. identify and explain the variation in successive ionisation energies of an element
    5. understand that ionisation energies are due to the attraction between the nucleus and the outer electron
    6. explain the factors influencing the ionisation energies of elements in terms of nuclear charge, atomic/ionic radius, shielding by inner shells and sub-shells and spin-pair repulsion
    7. deduce the electronic configurations of elements using successive ionisation energy data
    8. deduce the position of an element in the Periodic Table using successive ionisation energy data

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    First ionisation energy

    The first ionisation energy 第一电离能 (IE) is the energy needed to remove one electron from each atom in one mole of gaseous atoms, forming one mole of gaseous $+1$ ions.

    We use gaseous atoms so there are no forces between the particles. The unit is $\text{kJ mol}^{-1}$. As an equation, for an element X:

    $$\text{X}(\text{g}) \rightarrow \text{X}^{+}(\text{g}) + \text{e}^{-}$$

    The $(\text{g})$ shows the species is a gas.

    Successive ionisation energies

    After removing one electron, you can remove another. The second ionisation energy removes one electron from each $+1$ ion:

    $$\text{X}^{+}(\text{g}) \rightarrow \text{X}^{2+}(\text{g}) + \text{e}^{-}$$

    You can keep going. These are the successive ionisation energies 逐级电离能. Each is larger than the one before, because every electron is pulled away from a more positive ion.

    What ionisation energy depends on

    Ionisation energy comes from the attraction between the positive nucleus and the outer electron. Three main factors set how strong that attraction is:

    • nuclear charge: more protons pull the electrons more strongly, so the ionisation energy is higher.
    • atomic radius: the further the outer electron sits from the nucleus, the weaker the pull, so the ionisation energy is lower.
    • shielding: inner shells block some of the pull on the outer electron. More inner shells mean more shielding and a lower ionisation energy.

    There is a smaller effect too — spin-pair repulsion 自旋成对排斥. When two electrons share one orbital, they push each other a little, so one is easier to remove.

    Trends in first ionisation energy

    Across a period, the first ionisation energy generally rises. The nuclear charge grows while shielding stays about the same, so the outer electrons are held more tightly.

    Down a group, the first ionisation energy falls. Lower elements have more shells, so more shielding and a larger radius, and the outer electron is easier to remove.

    The dips are evidence for sub-shells

    The rise across a period is not smooth. Two small dips appear, and you should be able to explain both:

    • Group 2 to Group 13 (for example Mg to Al): the electron removed from Al comes from a 3p sub-shell, which is higher in energy than the full 3s sub-shell in Mg. A 3p electron is easier to remove, so the value dips.
    • Group 15 to Group 16 (for example P to S): in S, one 3p orbital now holds a pair of electrons. Spin-pair repulsion makes one of them easier to remove, so the value dips.

    These dips are evidence that sub-shells exist.

    A graph of first ionisation energy across Period 3 rising overall but dipping at aluminium and at sulfur
    First ionisation energy rises across Period 3 but dips at Al and at S — evidence that sub-shells exist

    Successive ionisation energies are evidence for shells

    If you plot the successive ionisation energies of one element, the values rise, with big jumps at certain points. A big jump happens when the next electron must come from a shell closer to the nucleus.

    Count how many electrons come off easily before the first big jump — that is the number of electrons in the outer shell, which tells you the group the element is in. You can also use the pattern to work out the electronic configuration and the position of the element in the Periodic Table.

    A log-scale graph of the eleven successive ionisation energies of sodium, with two big jumps splitting the points into groups of 1, 8 and 2
    Successive ionisation energies of sodium (log scale): the big jumps reveal the $2,8,1$ shell structure
    Electrons removed before the first big jump Group
    1 Group 1
    2 Group 2
    3 Group 13

    Worked example. The first five successive ionisation energies of an element are $590$, $1150$, $4940$, $6480$ and $8120\ \text{kJ}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$. Which group is it in? Look for the big jump, not the biggest number. From the 1st to the 2nd the value roughly doubles, which is a normal rise. From the 2nd ($1150$) to the 3rd ($4940$) it more than quadruples: that is the jump. So two electrons come off easily before it, the outer shell holds 2 electrons, and the element is in Group 2. Count the electrons removed before the jump, and explain the jump properly: the next electron is being pulled from a shell closer to the nucleus, not from a different element.

    Explore

    The ionisation-energy trend — and its dips

    First ionisation energy generally rises across a period, but DIPS where a new p sub-shell starts and where a p-orbital pair first forms. Step across to find the two tell-tale dips.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    first ionisation energy 第一电离能 dì yī diàn lí néng
    successive ionisation energies 逐级电离能 zhú jí diàn lí néng
    spin-pair repulsion 自旋成对排斥 zì xuán chéng duì pái chì
    1.4

    Exam tips

    • Define isotopes in full: atoms of the same element with the same number of protons but a different number of neutrons — the mark scheme wants both halves.
    • 4s fills before 3d, but electrons are removed from 4s first when forming ions, so $\text{Fe}^{3+}$ is $[\text{Ar}]3\text{d}^5$ (not $[\text{Ar}]3\text{d}^3 4\text{s}^2$).
    • In successive ionisation energies, a big jump marks the start of a new (inner) shell — use the jumps to place the element in its group.
    • Explain every ionisation-energy trend with the same three factors: nuclear charge, distance and shielding, plus sub-shell effects for the small dips.
    • Learn the exact reason first ionisation energy of oxygen is below nitrogen: oxygen's paired 2p electrons repel, so one is easier to remove.
  • 2 Atoms, molecules and stoichiometry
    2.1

    Relative masses of atoms and molecules

    Syllabus
    1. define the unified atomic mass unit as one twelfth of the mass of a carbon-12 atom
    2. define relative atomic mass, $A_r$, relative isotopic mass, relative molecular mass, $M_r$, and relative formula mass in terms of the unified atomic mass unit

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Atoms 原子 are far too light to weigh in grams, so we compare every mass to one standard. The standard is the unified atomic mass unit 统一原子质量单位 (symbol u), defined as exactly one twelfth of the mass of one carbon-12 atom.

    Using this unit, we state masses as simple numbers:

    • the relative atomic mass 相对原子质量 $A_r$ of an element is the average mass of its atoms compared with $\tfrac{1}{12}$ of a carbon-12 atom. It is an average over all the isotopes 同位素, weighted by how common each one is.
    • the relative isotopic mass 相对同位素质量 is the mass of one atom of a single isotope, compared with $\tfrac{1}{12}$ of a carbon-12 atom.
    • the relative molecular mass 相对分子质量 $M_r$ of a molecule 分子 is the sum of the relative atomic masses of all its atoms.
    • the relative formula mass 相对式量 is the same idea for a substance that is not made of molecules (such as an ionic compound). Add up the relative atomic masses shown in the formula.
    A bar showing chlorine is 75% chlorine-35 and 25% chlorine-37, with the weighted-average calculation giving a relative atomic mass of 35.5
    Relative atomic mass is a weighted average: chlorine's two isotopes (75% ³⁵Cl, 25% ³⁷Cl) average to Aᵣ = 35.5

    To find $A_r$ from isotope data, multiply each isotope mass by its percentage, add these up, and divide by 100.

    Worked example. Chlorine is $75\%$ ${}^{35}\text{Cl}$ and $25\%$ ${}^{37}\text{Cl}$. Find its relative atomic mass.

    $$A_r = \frac{(75 \times 35) + (25 \times 37)}{100} = \frac{2625 + 925}{100} = 35.5.$$

    Worked example. A mass spectrometer shows copper is $69.2\%$ ${}^{63}\text{Cu}$ and $30.8\%$ ${}^{65}\text{Cu}$. Find its relative atomic mass.

    $$A_r = \frac{(69.2 \times 63) + (30.8 \times 65)}{100} = \frac{4359.6 + 2002.0}{100} = 63.6.$$
    Explore

    Relative mass lab

    relative atomic mass = weighted mean

    Change isotope abundance and see the weighted mean move.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    atom 原子 yuán zi
    unified atomic mass unit 统一原子质量单位 tǒng yī yuán zi zhì liàng dān wèi
    relative atomic mass 相对原子质量 xiāng duì yuán zi zhì liàng
    isotope 同位素 tóng wèi sù
    relative isotopic mass 相对同位素质量 xiāng duì tóng wèi sù zhì liàng
    relative molecular mass 相对分子质量 xiāng duì fèn zǐ zhì liàng
    molecule 分子 fèn zǐ
    relative formula mass 相对式量 xiāng duì shì liàng
    2.2

    The mole and the Avogadro constant

    Syllabus
    1. define and use the term mole in terms of the Avogadro constant

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A modern electronic laboratory balance
    A modern electronic balance measures mass — the basis of mole calculations.

    Chemists count particles in groups called moles, just as we count eggs in dozens.

    One mole 摩尔 (symbol mol) is the amount of substance that contains the same number of particles as there are atoms in exactly 12 g of carbon-12. That number is the Avogadro constant 阿伏伽德罗常量:

    $$N_A = 6.02 \times 10^{23}\ \text{mol}^{-1}$$

    So one mole of anything contains $6.02 \times 10^{23}$ particles. The particles may be atoms, molecules or ions 离子 — always say which.

    The mass of one mole in grams equals the relative mass ($A_r$ or $M_r$). This is the molar mass 摩尔质量, with units $\text{g mol}^{-1}$. The key equation is:

    $$n = \frac{m}{M}$$

    where $n$ is the amount in moles, $m$ is the mass in grams, and $M$ is the molar mass.

    Worked example. How many moles are in $8.0\ \text{g}$ of methane, $\text{CH}_4$? ($A_r$: C $= 12$, H $= 1$.)

    The molar mass is $M = 12 + 4(1) = 16\ \text{g mol}^{-1}$, so

    $$n = \frac{m}{M} = \frac{8.0}{16} = 0.50\ \text{mol}.$$
    A central moles box linked by double arrows to mass, number of particles, gas volume and solution concentration, each arrow labelled with its conversion
    The mole is the hub of every amount calculation: convert to mass ($n=m/M$), particles ($\times N_A$), gas volume ($n=V/24$) or solution ($n=cV$)
    Explore

    Mole mass lab

    n = m / M

    Change mass and see moles scale through molar mass.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mole 摩尔 mó ěr
    Avogadro constant 阿伏伽德罗常量 ā fú gā dé luó cháng liàng
    ion 离子 lí zi
    molar mass 摩尔质量 mó ěr zhì liàng
    2.3

    Formulas

    Syllabus
    1. write formulas of ionic compounds from ionic charges and oxidation numbers (shown by a Roman numeral), including: (a) the prediction of ionic charge from the position of an element in the Periodic Table (b) recall of the names and formulas for the following ions: $\text{NO}_3^-$, $\text{CO}_3^{2-}$, $\text{SO}_4^{2-}$, $\text{OH}^-$, $\text{NH}_4^+$, $\text{Zn}^{2+}$, $\text{Ag}^+$, $\text{HCO}_3^-$, $\text{PO}_4^{3-}$
    2. (a) write and construct equations (which should be balanced), including ionic equations (which should not include spectator ions) (b) use appropriate state symbols in equations
    3. define and use the terms empirical and molecular formula
    4. understand and use the terms anhydrous, hydrated and water of crystallisation
    5. calculate empirical and molecular formulas, using given data

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A compound 化合物 is a substance made of two or more elements chemically joined.

    Charges and formulas of ionic compounds

    In an ionic compound 离子化合物 the total positive charge balances the total negative charge, so the compound is neutral overall.

    You can predict the charge of many ions from the element's position in the Periodic Table:

    Group 1 2 13 15 16 17
    Usual ion charge $+1$ $+2$ $+3$ $-3$ $-2$ $-1$

    Hydrogen forms $\text{H}^+$, and the Group 18 noble gases do not normally form ions.

    Some ions you must know by name and formula:

    Name Formula
    nitrate $\text{NO}_3^{-}$
    carbonate $\text{CO}_3^{2-}$
    sulfate $\text{SO}_4^{2-}$
    hydroxide $\text{OH}^{-}$
    ammonium $\text{NH}_4^{+}$
    zinc $\text{Zn}^{2+}$
    silver $\text{Ag}^{+}$
    hydrogencarbonate $\text{HCO}_3^{-}$
    phosphate $\text{PO}_4^{3-}$

    For a metal that can have more than one charge, a Roman numeral shows the oxidation number 氧化数. For example, iron(II) is $\text{Fe}^{2+}$ and iron(III) is $\text{Fe}^{3+}$. To write a formula, balance the charges: iron(III) oxide is $\text{Fe}_2\text{O}_3$, because two $\text{Fe}^{3+}$ balance three $\text{O}^{2-}$.

    Equations and state symbols

    A chemical equation must be balanced 配平 — the same number of each kind of atom on both sides. Add state symbols 状态符号 to show the state of each species: (s) solid, (l) liquid, (g) gas, and (aq) aqueous 水溶液 (dissolved in water).

    An ionic equation 离子方程式 shows only the ions and molecules that actually change. The ions that do not change are spectator ions 旁观离子, and you leave them out. For example, the reaction that forms silver chloride is:

    $$\text{Ag}^{+}(\text{aq}) + \text{Cl}^{-}(\text{aq}) \rightarrow \text{AgCl}(\text{s})$$

    Empirical and molecular formulas

    The empirical formula 实验式 is the simplest whole-number ratio of the atoms of each element in a compound. The molecular formula 分子式 shows the actual number of atoms of each element in one molecule.

    For example, ethane has empirical formula $\text{CH}_3$ but molecular formula $\text{C}_2\text{H}_6$.

    Hydrated and anhydrous solids

    Some solids hold water inside their crystals. This water is the water of crystallisation 结晶水. A solid that contains it is hydrated 水合的; the same solid with the water removed is anhydrous 无水的.

    For example, hydrated copper(II) sulfate is $\text{CuSO}_4 \cdot 5\text{H}_2\text{O}$. Heating it drives off the water to leave anhydrous $\text{CuSO}_4$.

    Calculating empirical and molecular formulas

    To find the empirical formula from masses (or percentages by mass):

    1. divide each element's mass by its $A_r$ to get the moles.
    2. divide all the mole values by the smallest one.
    3. round to the nearest whole numbers — that ratio is the empirical formula.

    To get the molecular formula, you also need $M_r$. Find how many times the empirical formula mass fits into $M_r$, then multiply the formula by that number.

    Worked example. A compound is $40.0\%$ carbon, $6.7\%$ hydrogen and $53.3\%$ oxygen by mass. Find its empirical formula. ($A_r$: C $= 12$, H $= 1$, O $= 16$.)

    Take $100\ \text{g}$ and divide each mass by its $A_r$ to get moles: C $= 40.0/12 = 3.33$, H $= 6.7/1 = 6.7$, O $= 53.3/16 = 3.33$. Dividing through by the smallest ($3.33$) gives a ratio C : H : O $= 1 : 2 : 1$, so the empirical formula is $\text{CH}_2\text{O}$.

    The worked example laid out as a table: percentage by mass divided by Ar gives moles, dividing by the smallest gives the ratio 1 to 2 to 1, so the empirical formula is CH2O
    The empirical-formula recipe: divide by Ar, divide by the smallest, read off the ratio
    Explore

    Equation balancing route

    Follow atoms through a chemical equation so both sides match.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    compound 化合物 huà hé wù
    ionic compound 离子化合物 lí zi huà hé wù
    oxidation number 氧化数 yǎng huà shù
    balanced 配平 pèi píng
    state symbols 状态符号 zhuàng tài fú hào
    aqueous 水溶液 shuǐ róng yè
    ionic equation 离子方程式 lí zi fāng chéng shì
    spectator ions 旁观离子 páng guān lí zi
    empirical formula 实验式 shí yàn shì
    molecular formula 分子式 fēn zǐ shì
    water of crystallisation 结晶水 jié jīng shuǐ
    hydrated 水合的 shuǐ hé de
    anhydrous 无水的 wú shuǐ de
    2.4

    Reacting masses and volumes

    Syllabus
    1. perform calculations including use of the mole concept, involving: (a) reacting masses (from formulas and equations) including percentage yield calculations (b) volumes of gases (e.g. in the burning of hydrocarbons) (c) volumes and concentrations of solutions (d) limiting reagent and excess reagent (When performing calculations, candidates’ answers should reflect the number of significant figures given or asked for in the question. When rounding up or down, candidates should ensure that significant figures are neither lost unnecessarily nor used beyond what is justified (see also Mathematical requirements section).) (e) deduce stoichiometric relationships from calculations such as those in 2.4.1(a)–(d)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A titration being carried out
    A titration finds reacting volumes precisely.

    Reacting masses and percentage yield

    The numbers in front of each species in a balanced equation give the mole ratio — this is the stoichiometry 化学计量. To find a reacting mass: change the known mass to moles, use the mole ratio to find the moles you want, then change back to mass.

    Worked example. What mass of magnesium oxide forms when $4.8\ \text{g}$ of magnesium burns completely? $2\text{Mg} + \text{O}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{MgO}$. ($A_r$: Mg $= 24$, O $= 16$.)

    Moles of Mg $= 4.8/24 = 0.20\ \text{mol}$. The ratio Mg : MgO is $1 : 1$, so $0.20\ \text{mol}$ of MgO forms. Its molar mass is $24 + 16 = 40\ \text{g mol}^{-1}$, so

    $$m = nM = 0.20 \times 40 = 8.0\ \text{g}.$$
    The mole bridge for the magnesium example: 4.8 grams of magnesium divided by Ar gives 0.20 moles, the 1 to 1 ratio gives 0.20 moles of magnesium oxide, times Mr gives 8.0 grams
    The mole bridge: mass to moles, ratio, then back to mass

    In real reactions you usually get less product than the maximum. The percentage yield 产率 compares the amount you actually made with the most you could make:

    $$\text{percentage yield} = \frac{\text{actual amount of product}}{\text{maximum possible amount}} \times 100\%$$

    Limiting and excess reagent

    When two reactants are mixed, one usually runs out first. The limiting reagent 限量试剂 is the one that runs out — it decides how much product forms. The other is the excess reagent 过量试剂, because there is more than enough of it. Always base the calculation on the limiting reagent.

    To find it: work out the moles of each reactant, divide each by its number in the equation, and the smallest result is the limiting reagent.

    Burning 4 hydrogen molecules with 1 oxygen molecule makes 2 water molecules and leaves 2 hydrogen molecules unreacted
    The limiting reagent runs out first and decides how much product forms; the leftover reactant is in excess

    Volumes of gases

    At the same temperature and pressure, equal volumes of any gases contain equal numbers of molecules. At room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.), one mole of any gas takes up $24.0\ \text{dm}^3$, so:

    $$n = \frac{V}{24.0}\qquad (V \text{ in } \text{dm}^3 \text{ at r.t.p.})$$
    Two equal-sized boxes, one of hydrogen and one of carbon dioxide, each holding six molecules
    Equal volumes of gases at the same temperature and pressure hold equal numbers of molecules, whatever the gas

    This is used when burning hydrocarbons 碳氢化合物 (compounds of only carbon and hydrogen), where you compare gas volumes.

    Volumes and concentrations of solutions

    The concentration 浓度 of a solution is the amount of solute 溶质 in each cubic decimetre of solution 溶液, measured in $\text{mol dm}^{-3}$:

    $$n = c \times V$$

    where $c$ is the concentration and $V$ is the volume in $\text{dm}^3$. Remember that $1000\ \text{cm}^3 = 1\ \text{dm}^3$.

    Worked example. In a titration, $25.0\ \text{cm}^3$ of sodium hydroxide solution is exactly neutralised by $20.0\ \text{cm}^3$ of $0.100\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}$ hydrochloric acid: $\text{NaOH} + \text{HCl} \rightarrow \text{NaCl} + \text{H}_2\text{O}$. Find the concentration of the sodium hydroxide.

    Moles of HCl $= cV = 0.100 \times \dfrac{20.0}{1000} = 2.00 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{mol}$. The ratio is $1 : 1$, so there are $2.00 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{mol}$ of NaOH in $25.0\ \text{cm}^3$:

    $$c = \frac{n}{V} = \frac{2.00 \times 10^{-3}}{25.0/1000} = 0.0800\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}.$$

    This is the basis of a titration 滴定, where you find an unknown concentration by reacting it with a solution whose concentration you already know.

    A burette clamped on a stand above a conical flask on a white tile
    In a titration a burette adds a solution of known concentration to the unknown in the conical flask, until the indicator changes

    Significant figures

    Give your answer to a sensible number of significant figures 有效数字 — usually match the data in the question. Do not write more digits than the data supports, and do not round so early that you lose accuracy.

    Explore

    Reacting mass route

    Follow a balanced equation from known mass to predicted product mass.

    Explore

    Gas volume lab

    n = V / 24 dm3

    Change gas volume and see moles scale at room conditions.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    stoichiometry 化学计量 huà xué jì liàng
    percentage yield 产率 chǎn lǜ
    limiting reagent 限量试剂 xiàn liàng shì jì
    excess reagent 过量试剂 guò liàng shì jì
    hydrocarbons 碳氢化合物 tàn qīng huà hé wù
    concentration 浓度 nóng dù
    solute 溶质 róng zhì
    solution 溶液 róng yè
    titration 滴定 dī dìng
    significant figures 有效数字 yǒu xiào shù zì
    2.4

    Exam tips

    • Convert volumes to $\text{dm}^3$ before using concentration ($25.0\ \text{cm}^3 = 0.0250\ \text{dm}^3$); the missing $\div 1000$ is the most common titration error.
    • Use the balancing numbers as the mole ratio between species — never the $M_r$ values.
    • Empirical formula: divide each mass/percentage by $A_r$, then by the smallest, then scale to whole numbers; use $M_r$ to reach the molecular formula.
    • For gases at r.t.p. use $\text{volume} = \text{moles} \times 24\ \text{dm}^3$; quote the equation you use every time.
    • Give the answer to the same significant figures as the data (usually 3) and always include units.
  • 3 Chemical bonding
    3.1

    Electronegativity

    Syllabus
    1. define electronegativity as the power of an atom to attract electrons to itself
    2. explain the factors influencing the electronegativities of the elements in terms of nuclear charge, atomic radius and shielding by inner shells and sub-shells
    3. state and explain the trends in electronegativity across a period and down a group of the Periodic Table
    4. use the differences in Pauling electronegativity values to predict the formation of ionic and covalent bonds (the presence of covalent character in some ionic compounds will not be assessed) (Pauling electronegativity values will be given where necessary)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Electronegativity 电负性 is the power of an atom to attract the electrons 电子 in a bond towards itself.

    Three factors decide how electronegative an atom is:

    • nuclear charge 核电荷: more protons pull the bonding electrons more strongly.
    • atomic radius 原子半径: the closer the bond is to the nucleus, the stronger the pull.
    • shielding 屏蔽 by inner shells and sub-shells: more inner electrons weaken the pull on the bonding electrons.

    So electronegativity rises across a period (more nuclear charge, smaller radius) and falls down a group (larger radius, more shielding). Fluorine is the most electronegative element.

    A grid shaded from pale at the bottom-left to deep at the top-right, with fluorine marked in the top-right corner
    Electronegativity rises across a period and falls down a group, so fluorine is the most electronegative element

    You can use the difference in Pauling electronegativity 鲍林电负性 values to predict the bond type. A large difference gives an ionic bond; a small difference gives a covalent bond.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electronegativity 电负性 diàn fù xìng
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    nuclear charge 核电荷 hé diàn hè
    atomic radius 原子半径 yuán zi bàn jìng
    shielding 屏蔽 píng bì
    Pauling electronegativity 鲍林电负性 bào lín diàn fù xìng
    3.2

    Ionic bonding

    Syllabus
    1. define ionic bonding as the electrostatic attraction between oppositely charged ions (positively charged cations and negatively charged anions)
    2. describe ionic bonding including the examples of sodium chloride, magnesium oxide and calcium fluoride

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Ionic bonding: electron transfer

    Ionic bonding 离子键 is the electrostatic attraction 静电引力 between oppositely charged ions 离子 — positive cations 阳离子 and negative anions 阴离子.

    It forms when a metal gives electrons to a non-metal. Good examples are sodium chloride ($\text{NaCl}$), magnesium oxide ($\text{MgO}$) and calcium fluoride ($\text{CaF}_2$). The ions pack into a regular giant lattice 晶格, held together by the attraction in every direction.

    A dot-and-cross diagram showing a sodium atom with one cross transferring it to a chlorine atom, giving Na+ and Cl- ions in brackets
    Ionic bonding in NaCl: sodium transfers its single outer electron to chlorine, giving Na$^+$ and a full-octet Cl$^-$
    A clear-grey rock salt crystal on a black background, made of many small cube-shaped blocks with right-angled faces
    A real crystal of rock salt (halite, NaCl); the cubic shapes mirror the giant ionic lattice inside
    Explore

    Forming an ionic bond (NaCl)

    Step through it. A metal hands its outer electron to a non-metal; the oppositely charged ions then attract in a giant lattice.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    ionic bonding 离子键 lí zi jiàn
    electrostatic attraction 静电引力 jìng diàn yǐn lì
    ion 离子 lí zi
    cation 阳离子 yáng lí zi
    anion 阴离子 yīn lí zi
    lattice 晶格 jīng gé
    3.3

    Metallic bonding

    Syllabus
    1. define metallic bonding as the electrostatic attraction between positive metal ions and delocalised electrons

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Metallic bonding 金属键 is the electrostatic attraction between positive metal ions and a "sea" of delocalised electrons 离域电子.

    The outer electrons are free to move through the whole metal. This explains why metals conduct electricity and are strong.

    A regular grid of positive metal ions with small electrons scattered in the gaps between them
    Metallic bonding: positive metal ions sit in a sea of delocalised electrons that are free to move
    Explore

    Inside a metal — and why it behaves that way

    Step through it. Positive ions sit in a shared sea of delocalised electrons. That one picture explains conduction, malleability, and strength.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    metallic bonding 金属键 jīn shǔ jiàn
    delocalised electrons 离域电子 lí yù diàn zi
    3.4

    Covalent and coordinate bonding

    Syllabus
    1. define covalent bonding as electrostatic attraction between the nuclei of two atoms and a shared pair of electrons (a) describe covalent bonding in molecules including: • hydrogen, $\text{H}_2$ • oxygen, $\text{O}_2$ • nitrogen, $\text{N}_2$ • chlorine, $\text{Cl}_2$ • hydrogen chloride, $\text{HCl}$ • carbon dioxide, $\text{CO}_2$ • ammonia, $\text{NH}_3$ • methane, $\text{CH}_4$ • ethane, $\text{C}_2\text{H}_6$ • ethene, $\text{C}_2\text{H}_4$ (b) understand that elements in period 3 can expand their octet including in the compounds sulfur dioxide, $\text{SO}_2$, phosphorus pentachloride, $\text{PCl}_5$, and sulfur hexafluoride, $\text{SF}_6$ (c) describe coordinate (dative covalent) bonding, including in the reaction between ammonia and hydrogen chloride gases to form the ammonium ion, $\text{NH}_4^+$, and in the $\text{Al}_2\text{Cl}_6$ molecule
    2. (a) describe covalent bonds in terms of orbital overlap giving $\sigma$ and $\pi$ bonds: • $\sigma$ bonds are formed by direct overlap of orbitals between the bonding atoms • $\pi$ bonds are formed by the sideways overlap of adjacent p orbitals above and below the $\sigma$ bond (b) describe how the $\sigma$ and $\pi$ bonds form in molecules including $\text{H}_2$, $\text{C}_2\text{H}_6$, $\text{C}_2\text{H}_4$, $\text{HCN}$ and $\text{N}_2$ (c) use the concept of hybridisation to describe $\text{sp}$, $\text{sp}^2$ and $\text{sp}^3$ orbitals
    3. (a) define the terms: • bond energy as the energy required to break one mole of a particular covalent bond in the gaseous state • bond length as the internuclear distance of two covalently bonded atoms (b) use bond energy values and the concept of bond length to compare the reactivity of covalent molecules

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Covalent bonding: a shared pair

    Covalent bonding 共价键 is the electrostatic attraction between the nuclei of two atoms and a shared pair of electrons.

    Simple molecules with covalent bonds include $\text{H}_2$, $\text{O}_2$, $\text{N}_2$, $\text{Cl}_2$, $\text{HCl}$, $\text{CO}_2$, $\text{NH}_3$, $\text{CH}_4$, $\text{C}_2\text{H}_6$ and $\text{C}_2\text{H}_4$. A double bond shares two pairs; a triple bond (as in $\text{N}_2$) shares three pairs.

    Atoms in Period 3 and below can expand the octet 扩展八隅体 — hold more than eight electrons in their outer shell. Examples are $\text{SO}_2$, $\text{PCl}_5$ and $\text{SF}_6$.

    A coordinate bond 配位键 (also called a dative covalent bond) is a covalent bond where both shared electrons come from the same atom. For example, when ammonia and hydrogen chloride gases meet, the lone pair on the nitrogen forms a coordinate bond to $\text{H}^+$, making the ammonium ion $\text{NH}_4^+$. Coordinate bonds also join the two halves of the $\text{Al}_2\text{Cl}_6$ molecule.

    Ammonia's lone pair forming a new bond to an incoming hydrogen ion, shown as an arrow, to make the ammonium ion in brackets with a plus charge
    A coordinate (dative) bond: nitrogen's lone pair forms the fourth N–H bond, both electrons coming from N

    Sigma and pi bonds

    Covalent bonds form when orbitals 轨道 overlap:

    • a sigma bond σ forms by the direct, head-on overlap 重叠 of orbitals between the two atoms.
    • a pi bond π forms by the sideways overlap of two p orbitals, above and below the sigma bond.

    A single bond is one sigma bond. A double bond (as in $\text{C}_2\text{H}_4$) is one sigma plus one pi bond. A triple bond (as in $\text{N}_2$ and $\text{HCN}$) is one sigma plus two pi bonds.

    On the left two orbitals overlapping head-on between the nuclei; on the right two vertical p orbitals overlapping sideways above and below the axis
    A $\sigma$ bond forms by direct head-on overlap; a $\pi$ bond forms by the sideways overlap of two p orbitals, above and below

    Hybridisation

    Hybridisation 杂化 mixes orbitals in the same shell to make new, equal orbitals for bonding:

    • $\text{sp}$: two equal orbitals, used in a linear molecule.
    • $\text{sp}^2$: three equal orbitals, used in a flat molecule like $\text{C}_2\text{H}_4$.
    • $\text{sp}^3$: four equal orbitals, used in $\text{CH}_4$.

    Bond energy and bond length

    • bond energy 键能 is the energy needed to break one mole of a particular covalent bond in the gas state.
    • bond length 键长 is the distance between the centres of the two bonded atoms.

    A shorter bond is usually stronger (higher bond energy). Triple bonds are shorter and stronger than double bonds, which are shorter and stronger than single bonds. Stronger bonds make a molecule harder to react.

    Explore

    Sharing a pair of electrons

    Step through a covalent bond: two atoms overlap and share a pair so each reaches a full shell — when the two pull equally the bond is non-polar.

    Explore

    Covalent bonding (sharing)

    Two non-metal atoms overlap and share a pair of electrons — counted for both — so each reaches a full outer shell. O₂ shares two pairs (a double bond).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    covalent bonding 共价键 gòng jià jiàn
    expand the octet 扩展八隅体 kuò zhǎn bā yú tǐ
    coordinate bond 配位键 pèi wèi jiàn
    orbital 轨道 guǐ dào
    sigma bond σ键 σ jiàn
    overlap 重叠 chóng dié
    pi bond π键 π jiàn
    hybridisation 杂化 zá huà
    bond energy 键能 jiàn néng
    bond length 键长 jiàn zhǎng
    Exercise sheet
    3.5

    Shapes of molecules

    Syllabus
    1. state and explain the shapes of, and bond angles in, molecules by using VSEPR theory, including as simple examples: • $\text{BF}_3$ (trigonal planar, 120°) • $\text{CO}_2$ (linear, 180°) • $\text{CH}_4$ (tetrahedral, 109.5°) • $\text{NH}_3$ (pyramidal, 107°) • $\text{H}_2\text{O}$ (non-linear, 104.5°) • $\text{SF}_6$ (octahedral, 90°) • $\text{PF}_5$ (trigonal bipyramidal, 120° and 90°)
    2. predict the shapes of, and bond angles in, molecules and ions analogous to those specified in 3.5.1

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A ball-and-stick molecular model
    A molecular model shows the three-dimensional shape of a covalent molecule.

    To work out a shape, use VSEPR theory 价层电子对互斥理论: the pairs of electrons around the central atom push apart as far as possible, because like charges repel.

    A lone pair 孤对电子 (not in a bond) pushes more strongly than a bonding pair 成键电子对. Each lone pair squeezes the bond angle 键角 by about $2.5°$.

    Molecule Shape Bond angle
    $\text{CO}_2$ linear 直线形 $180°$
    $\text{BF}_3$ trigonal planar 平面三角形 $120°$
    $\text{CH}_4$ tetrahedral 四面体形 $109.5°$
    $\text{NH}_3$ pyramidal 三角锥形 $107°$
    $\text{H}_2\text{O}$ bent 角形 $104.5°$
    $\text{PF}_5$ trigonal bipyramidal 三角双锥形 $120°$ and $90°$
    $\text{SF}_6$ octahedral 八面体形 $90°$

    $\text{NH}_3$ has one lone pair and $\text{H}_2\text{O}$ has two, which is why their angles drop below the $109.5°$ of $\text{CH}_4$. You can predict the shapes of similar molecules and ions in the same way.

    Seven molecular shapes drawn with a central atom and bonded atoms: linear, trigonal planar, tetrahedral, pyramidal, bent, trigonal bipyramidal and octahedral, each with its bond angle
    The seven shapes from VSEPR theory; the lone pairs on NH$_3$ and H$_2$O push harder, squeezing the bond angle below $109.5°$

    Worked example. Predict the shape and bond angle of $\text{NH}_3$ and of $\text{H}_2\text{O}$. Nitrogen has 5 outer electrons and forms 3 bonds, leaving 3 bonding pairs and 1 lone pair - four pairs in total, so they start from the tetrahedral $109.5°$. The lone pair repels more strongly and squeezes the angle by about $2.5°$, giving a pyramidal shape at about $107°$. Oxygen forms 2 bonds and keeps 2 lone pairs: still four pairs, but now two squeezes, so the shape is bent at about $104.5°$. Count all the pairs to fix the basic geometry, subtract $2.5°$ for each lone pair, and name the shape from the atoms - $\text{NH}_3$ has four pairs but is pyramidal, not tetrahedral.

    Explore

    Shape from bonding and lone pairs

    Count the bonding pairs and lone pairs around the central atom; they repel into the shape with least strain. Three bonds and one lone pair give a pyramid, like ammonia (NH3).

    Explore

    Predicting molecular shape

    Set the bonding and lone pairs. Electron pairs repel and spread out as far apart as possible — that fixes the shape and bond angle.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    VSEPR theory 价层电子对互斥理论 jià céng diàn zi duì hù chì lǐ lùn
    lone pair 孤对电子 gū duì diàn zi
    bonding pair 成键电子对 chéng jiàn diàn zi duì
    bond angle 键角 jiàn jiǎo
    linear 直线形 zhí xiàn xíng
    trigonal planar 平面三角形 píng miàn sān jiǎo xíng
    tetrahedral 四面体形 sì miàn tǐ xíng
    pyramidal 三角锥形 sān jiǎo zhuī xíng
    bent 角形 jiǎo xíng
    trigonal bipyramidal 三角双锥形 sān jiǎo shuāng zhuī xíng
    octahedral 八面体形 bā miàn tǐ xíng
    Exercise sheet
    3.6

    Intermolecular forces

    Syllabus
    1. (a) describe hydrogen bonding, limited to molecules containing N–H and O–H groups, including ammonia and water as simple examples (b) use the concept of hydrogen bonding to explain the anomalous properties of $\text{H}_2\text{O}$ (ice and water): • its relatively high melting and boiling points • its relatively high surface tension • the density of the solid ice compared with the liquid water
    2. use the concept of electronegativity to explain bond polarity and dipole moments of molecules
    3. (a) describe van der Waals’ forces as the intermolecular forces between molecular entities other than those due to bond formation, and use the term van der Waals’ forces as a generic term to describe all intermolecular forces (b) describe the types of van der Waals’ forces: • instantaneous dipole–induced dipole (id-id) forces, also called London dispersion forces • permanent dipole–permanent dipole (pd-pd) forces, including hydrogen bonding (c) describe hydrogen bonding and understand that hydrogen bonding is a special case of permanent dipole–permanent dipole forces between molecules where hydrogen is bonded to a highly electronegative atom
    4. state that, in general, ionic, covalent and metallic bonding are stronger than intermolecular forces

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Intermolecular forces 分子间作用力 are the forces between molecules 分子. They are much weaker than the ionic, covalent and metallic bonding inside substances.

    Bond polarity and dipoles

    When two atoms with different electronegativity share a bond, the electrons sit closer to the more electronegative atom. The bond then has a polarity 极性: one end is slightly negative ($\delta-$) and the other slightly positive ($\delta+$). This separation of charge is a dipole 偶极.

    If the dipoles in a molecule do not cancel, the whole molecule has a dipole moment 偶极矩 and is polar. If they cancel by symmetry (as in $\text{CO}_2$), the molecule is non-polar.

    Van der Waals' forces

    Van der Waals' forces 范德华力 is the general name for all intermolecular forces. There are two main types.

    The first type is the instantaneous dipole–induced dipole force, also called the London dispersion force 伦敦色散力. Moving electrons make a brief instantaneous dipole 瞬时偶极, which then creates a matching induced dipole 诱导偶极 in a nearby molecule. These forces act between all molecules and get stronger when there are more electrons.

    Two molecules side by side: a brief instantaneous dipole in one induces a matching dipole in its neighbour, so the two attract
    A London force: a momentary dipole in one molecule induces a dipole in its neighbour, so they attract — this acts between all molecules

    The second type is the permanent dipole–permanent dipole force. It acts between molecules that are always polar, because each one has a permanent dipole 永久偶极.

    Hydrogen bonding

    Hydrogen bonding 氢键 is a strong, special case of permanent dipole forces. It forms when hydrogen is bonded to a very electronegative atom — nitrogen, oxygen or fluorine — and is attracted to a lone pair on an N, O or F atom in a neighbour. Look for N–H and O–H groups, as in ammonia and water.

    Three water molecules linked by dashed hydrogen bonds, each running from a slightly positive hydrogen to the slightly negative oxygen of a neighbour
    Hydrogen bonding in water: a $\delta+$ hydrogen is attracted to a lone pair on the $\delta-$ oxygen of a neighbouring molecule

    Hydrogen bonding explains the strange behaviour of water:

    • its high melting and boiling point 沸点, because many hydrogen bonds must be broken.
    • its high surface tension 表面张力.
    • ice is less dense than liquid water, because hydrogen bonds hold the molecules in an open, spread-out structure, so ice floats.
    Explore

    Polarity and intermolecular forces lab

    Classify molecules by the feature that controls attractions.

    Explore

    Why hydrogen bonds make water special

    Step through it. One weak-but-strong force — the hydrogen bond — explains water's high boiling point, why ice floats, and why it dissolves so much.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    intermolecular forces 分子间作用力 fèn zǐ jiàn zuò yòng lì
    molecule 分子 fèn zǐ
    polarity 极性 jí xìng
    dipole 偶极 ǒu jí
    dipole moment 偶极矩 ǒu jí jǔ
    van der Waals' forces 范德华力 fàn dé huá lì
    London dispersion forces 伦敦色散力 lún dūn sè sàn lì
    instantaneous dipole 瞬时偶极 shùn shí ǒu jí
    induced dipole 诱导偶极 yòu dǎo ǒu jí
    permanent dipole 永久偶极 yǒng jiǔ ǒu jí
    hydrogen bonding 氢键 qīng jiàn
    boiling point 沸点 fèi diǎn
    surface tension 表面张力 biǎo miàn zhāng lì
    3.7

    Dot-and-cross diagrams

    Syllabus
    1. use dot-and-cross diagrams to illustrate ionic, covalent and coordinate bonding including the representation of any compounds stated in 3.4 and 3.5 (dot-and-cross diagrams may include species with atoms which have an expanded octet or species with an odd number of electrons)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A dot-and-cross diagram 点叉图 shows the outer electrons of each atom, using dots for one atom and crosses for the other. This makes it clear where each bonding electron came from. You can draw them for ionic, covalent and coordinate bonding, including molecules with an expanded octet or an odd number of electrons.

    Dot-and-cross diagrams for water and nitrogen: water shows two bonding pairs and two lone pairs on oxygen, nitrogen shows three shared pairs and a lone pair on each atom
    Covalent dot-and-cross: each shared pair is one electron from each atom. Water has two bonding pairs and two lone pairs; nitrogen shares three pairs (a triple bond)
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    dot-and-cross diagram 点叉图 diǎn chā tú
    3.7

    Exam tips

    • For shapes, count bonding pairs and lone pairs, name the shape, then give the exact bond angle (e.g. $\text{NH}_3$: pyramidal, $107^\circ$) — each lone pair lowers the angle by about $2.5^\circ$.
    • A dative (coordinate) bond has both electrons from one atom (e.g. $\text{NH}_4^+$, $\text{H}_3\text{O}^+$); draw the arrow from the lone pair.
    • Name the intermolecular force precisely: hydrogen bonding needs H bonded to N, O or F; otherwise it is permanent-dipole or induced-dipole (van der Waals). Never call van der Waals forces "bonds".
    • Explain a physical property by stating which forces are broken, not just "strong bonds".
  • 4 States of matter
    4.1

    The gaseous state

    Syllabus
    1. explain the origin of pressure in a gas in terms of collisions between gas molecules and the wall of the container
    2. understand that ideal gases have zero particle volume and no intermolecular forces of attraction
    3. state and use the ideal gas equation $pV = nRT$ in calculations, including in the determination of $M_r$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Steam rising from boiling water
    Boiling turns liquid water into steam — a change between states of matter.

    Where gas pressure comes from

    Gas molecules move fast in all directions. They keep hitting — colliding 碰撞 with — the walls of their container. Each hit gives the wall a tiny push. The pressure 压强 of the gas is the overall result of these many collisions on the walls.

    Fast-moving particles inside a box, each with a velocity arrow, some striking the walls and marked with an impact star
    Gas pressure: fast molecules move in all directions and collide with the walls; the many tiny pushes add up to the pressure

    Ideal gases

    An ideal gas 理想气体 is a simple model. We assume two things:

    • the particles themselves take up zero volume.
    • there are no intermolecular forces 分子间作用力 of attraction between the particles.

    A real gas 实际气体 follows this model closely at low pressure and high temperature. It behaves least like an ideal gas at high pressure and low temperature, when the particles are squeezed close together and the forces between them start to matter.

    Two boxes: on the left an ideal gas of tiny point particles with velocity arrows and no forces; on the right a real gas at high pressure and low temperature with larger crowded particles joined by dashed attraction lines
    An ideal gas is a model: point particles with no forces between them. A real gas behaves least like this at high pressure and low temperature, when the particles are crowded and their real size and attractions start to matter

    The ideal gas equation

    The ideal gas equation 理想气体方程 links pressure, volume, amount and temperature:

    $$pV = nRT$$

    where $p$ is the pressure in Pa, $V$ is the volume in $\text{m}^3$, $n$ is the amount in moles, $T$ is the temperature in kelvin 开尔文 (K), and $R$ is the gas constant 气体常量 ($8.31\ \text{J K}^{-1}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$).

    Always change the units first: °C to K (add 273), and $\text{cm}^3$ or $\text{dm}^3$ to $\text{m}^3$.

    Worked example. Find the volume of $0.50\ \text{mol}$ of an ideal gas at $27\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ and $100\ \text{kPa}$. ($R = 8.31\ \text{J K}^{-1}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$.)

    Convert first: $T = 300\ \text{K}$, $p = 1.00 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$. Then

    $$V = \frac{nRT}{p} = \frac{0.50 \times 8.31 \times 300}{1.00 \times 10^{5}} = 0.0125\ \text{m}^3\ (= 12.5\ \text{dm}^3).$$

    You can also use the equation to find a molar mass 摩尔质量. Since $n = m/M$:

    $$pV = \frac{m}{M}RT \qquad\Rightarrow\qquad M = \frac{mRT}{pV}$$

    This lets you work out $M_r$ from the mass (or the density) of a gas.

    Worked example. A flask holds $0.96\ \text{g}$ of a gas in $600\ \text{cm}^3$ at $100\ \text{kPa}$ and $27\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$. Find the molar mass of the gas. ($R = 8.31\ \text{J K}^{-1}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$.)

    Convert: $V = 6.00 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{m}^3$, $T = 300\ \text{K}$. Then

    $$M = \frac{mRT}{pV} = \frac{0.96 \times 8.31 \times 300}{(1.00 \times 10^{5})(6.00 \times 10^{-4})} \approx 40\ \text{g mol}^{-1}.$$
    Explore

    The gaseous state

    p = k / V

    Boyle's law: at constant temperature pressure ∝ 1/volume.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    collide 碰撞 pèng zhuàng
    pressure 压强 yā qiáng
    ideal gas 理想气体 lǐ xiǎng qì tǐ
    intermolecular forces 分子间作用力 fèn zǐ jiàn zuò yòng lì
    real gas 实际气体 shí jì qì tǐ
    ideal gas equation 理想气体方程 lǐ xiǎng qì tǐ fāng chéng
    kelvin 开尔文 kāi ěr wén
    gas constant 气体常量 qì tǐ cháng liàng
    molar mass 摩尔质量 mó ěr zhì liàng
    Exercise sheet
    4.2

    Bonding and structure

    Syllabus
    1. describe, in simple terms, the lattice structure of a crystalline solid which is: (a) giant ionic, including sodium chloride and magnesium oxide (b) simple molecular, including iodine, buckminsterfullerene $\text{C}_{60}$ and ice (c) giant molecular, including silicon(IV) oxide, graphite and diamond (d) giant metallic, including copper
    2. describe, interpret and predict the effect of different types of structure and bonding on the physical properties of substances, including melting point, boiling point, electrical conductivity and solubility
    3. deduce the type of structure and bonding present in a substance from given information

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A cluster of quartz crystals
    Quartz is a giant covalent structure of silicon and oxygen.

    How a substance behaves depends on how its particles are joined. There are four main structures of a crystalline solid 晶体.

    Four panels: a giant ionic lattice of alternating positive and negative ions, separate small molecules, a bonded covalent network, and metal ions in an electron sea
    The four structures of a crystalline solid — the structure decides the melting point, conductivity and solubility

    Giant ionic

    A giant ionic 离子晶体 structure is a huge regular lattice 晶格 of positive and negative ions 离子, held together by strong attraction in every direction. Examples are sodium chloride and magnesium oxide.

    Simple molecular

    A simple molecular 分子晶体 structure is made of small molecules 分子. The bonds inside each molecule are strong, but the intermolecular forces between the molecules are weak. Examples are iodine ($\text{I}_2$), fullerene 富勒烯 ($\text{C}_{60}$) and ice.

    Giant molecular

    A giant molecular 原子晶体 structure (also called giant covalent) is a huge network of atoms joined by strong covalent bonds 共价键. Examples are silicon(IV) oxide 二氧化硅, graphite 石墨 and diamond 金刚石.

    On the left a diamond node with each carbon bonded to four others; on the right graphite as stacked hexagonal layers held by weak forces
    Two giant covalent forms of carbon: diamond is a rigid 3D network (very hard); graphite has sliding layers and spare electrons that conduct
    A rough octahedral diamond crystal
    A real diamond in the rock it grew in. That whole crystal is one giant molecule — a single unbroken network of carbon atoms, each bonded to four others. Breaking it means breaking countless strong covalent bonds, which is why diamond is the hardest natural material

    Giant metallic

    A giant metallic 金属晶体 structure is a lattice of positive metal ions in a "sea" of delocalised electrons 离域电子. An example is copper.

    A rounded nugget of copper with a bright reddish metallic shine and small green spots of tarnish
    A piece of pure copper metal. The shine, and the way metals conduct and bend, all come from that giant lattice of copper ions sitting in a shared sea of delocalised electrons

    Physical properties

    The structure decides the physical properties:

    Structure Melting/boiling point Conducts electricity? Solubility in water
    giant ionic high only when molten or dissolved usually soluble
    simple molecular low no usually low
    giant molecular very high no (except graphite) insoluble
    giant metallic high yes (solid and molten) insoluble
    • melting point 熔点 and boiling point 沸点 are high when strong forces (ionic, covalent or metallic) must be broken, and low when only weak intermolecular forces break.
    • electrical conductivity 导电性 needs charged particles that can move — ions that are free (when molten or dissolved) or delocalised electrons. Graphite conducts because some of its electrons are delocalised.
    • solubility 溶解度 in water is usually high for ionic solids and low for molecular and giant covalent solids.

    You can work backwards too: from the melting point, conductivity and solubility of an unknown substance, deduce the type of structure and bonding it has.

    Explore

    Giant structure lab

    Compare giant structures by particles and bonding.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    crystalline solid 晶体 jīng tǐ
    giant ionic 离子晶体 lí zi jīng tǐ
    lattice 晶格 jīng gé
    ion 离子 lí zi
    simple molecular 分子晶体 fēn zǐ jīng tǐ
    molecule 分子 fèn zǐ
    fullerene 富勒烯 fù lēi xī
    giant molecular 原子晶体 yuán zi jīng tǐ
    covalent bonds 共价键 gòng jià jiàn
    silicon(IV) oxide 二氧化硅 èr yǎng huà guī
    graphite 石墨 shí mò
    diamond 金刚石 jīn gāng shí
    giant metallic 金属晶体 jīn shǔ jīng tǐ
    delocalised electrons 离域电子 lí yù diàn zi
    melting point 熔点 róng diǎn
    boiling point 沸点 fèi diǎn
    electrical conductivity 导电性 dǎo diàn xìng
    solubility 溶解度 róng jiě dù
    4.2

    Exam tips

    • Use SI units in $pV = nRT$: pressure in Pa, volume in $\text{m}^3$ ($\text{cm}^3 \times 10^{-6}$), temperature in K ($^\circ\text{C} + 273$).
    • State the ideal-gas assumptions (negligible molecular volume, no intermolecular forces) and when real gases deviate (high pressure, low temperature).
    • Link each property to structure: giant ionic (high m.p., conducts molten), giant covalent (very high m.p.), simple molecular (low m.p.), giant metallic (conducts, malleable).
    • Graphite conducts because each carbon has a delocalised electron; diamond does not — a favourite comparison.
  • 5 Chemical energetics
    5.1

    Enthalpy change, ΔH

    Syllabus
    1. understand that chemical reactions are accompanied by enthalpy changes and these changes can be exothermic ($\Delta H$ is negative) or endothermic ($\Delta H$ is positive)
    2. construct and interpret a reaction pathway diagram, in terms of the enthalpy change of the reaction and of the activation energy
    3. define and use the terms: (a) standard conditions (this syllabus assumes that these are $298\text{ K}$ and $101\text{ kPa}$) shown by $^{\ominus}$. (b) enthalpy change with particular reference to: reaction, $\Delta H_r$, formation, $\Delta H_f$, combustion, $\Delta H_c$, neutralisation, $\Delta H_{\text{neut}}$
    4. understand that energy transfers occur during chemical reactions because of the breaking and making of chemical bonds
    5. use bond energies ($\Delta H$ positive, i.e. bond breaking) to calculate enthalpy change of reaction, $\Delta H_r$
    6. understand that some bond energies are exact and some bond energies are averages
    7. calculate enthalpy changes from appropriate experimental results, including the use of the relationships $q = mc\Delta T$ and $\Delta H = -mc\Delta T/n$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Reaction profile: activation energy and ΔH
    A blue Bunsen burner flame
    Burning fuel is exothermic, releasing energy to the surroundings.
    An instant cold pack
    An instant cold pack uses an endothermic reaction that takes in heat.

    Every chemical reaction takes in or gives out energy. This energy change, measured at constant pressure, is the enthalpy change 焓变, with symbol $\Delta H$.

    • in an exothermic 放热 reaction the system gives out heat, so the products have less energy than the reactants and $\Delta H$ is negative.
    • in an endothermic 吸热 reaction the system takes in heat, so the products have more energy than the reactants and $\Delta H$ is positive.

    Reaction pathway diagrams

    A reaction pathway diagram 反应路径图 shows the energy of the reactants and products, and the energy "hill" between them. The height of the hill is the activation energy 活化能 — the least energy the particles need before they can react.

    • exothermic: products sit lower than reactants ($\Delta H < 0$).
    • endothermic: products sit higher than reactants ($\Delta H > 0$).
    Two reaction pathway diagrams side by side: an exothermic one with products below the reactants, and an endothermic one with products above
    Exothermic reactions end lower than they start ($\Delta H<0$); endothermic reactions end higher ($\Delta H>0$)

    Standard conditions and types of enthalpy change

    Energy values are compared under standard conditions 标准条件: $298\ \text{K}$ and $101\ \text{kPa}$, shown by the symbol $^{\ominus}$. Each substance is in its normal physical state at those conditions.

    Symbol Name Definition (per mole, under standard conditions)
    $\Delta H_r^{\ominus}$ enthalpy change of reaction 反应焓变 for the amounts shown in the equation
    $\Delta H_f^{\ominus}$ enthalpy change of formation 生成焓变 one mole of a compound forms from its elements
    $\Delta H_c^{\ominus}$ enthalpy change of combustion 燃烧焓变 one mole of a substance burns completely in oxygen
    $\Delta H_{\text{neut}}^{\ominus}$ enthalpy change of neutralisation 中和焓变 one mole of water forms from an acid and an alkali
    Two processes: formation goes from elements to one mole of a compound; combustion goes from one mole of a substance plus oxygen to carbon dioxide and water
    Don't confuse them: formation builds 1 mol of a compound from its elements; combustion burns 1 mol of a substance in oxygen

    Energy from breaking and making bonds

    During a reaction, old bonds break and new bonds form. Breaking a bond needs energy (endothermic); making a bond releases energy (exothermic). The enthalpy change of the reaction is the difference between the two:

    $$\Delta H_r = \sum (\text{bond energies broken}) - \sum (\text{bond energies made})$$

    The bond energy 键能 is the energy needed to break one mole of a particular bond in the gas state, so it is always positive. Some bond energies are exact (for one specific molecule); others are averages taken over many different molecules, so calculations using them are only approximate.

    Worked example. Use bond energies to find $\Delta H$ for $\text{H}_2 + \text{Cl}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{HCl}$. Bond energies (kJ mol⁻¹): H–H $= 436$, Cl–Cl $= 242$, H–Cl $= 431$.

    $$\Delta H = \sum(\text{broken}) - \sum(\text{made}) = (436 + 242) - (2 \times 431) = 678 - 862 = -184\ \text{kJ mol}^{-1}.$$
    A stepped energy diagram: reactants rise to separate gaseous atoms as bonds break, then fall to products as bonds form
    Breaking bonds takes energy in; making bonds gives energy out. $\Delta H$ is the difference between the two

    Measuring enthalpy change in the lab

    When a reaction heats up (or cools down) a known mass of water or solution, the heat transferred is:

    $$q = mc\Delta T$$

    where $m$ is the mass, $c$ is the specific heat capacity 比热容 (how much energy raises 1 g by 1 K), and $\Delta T$ is the temperature change. The enthalpy change per mole is then:

    $$\Delta H = -\frac{mc\Delta T}{n}$$

    The minus sign makes $\Delta H$ negative when the temperature rises (an exothermic reaction).

    Worked example. Burning $0.50\ \text{g}$ of methanol ($M_r = 32$) raises the temperature of $100\ \text{g}$ of water by $18\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$. Find the enthalpy change of combustion per mole. ($c = 4.18\ \text{J g}^{-1}\,\text{K}^{-1}$.)

    The heat released is $q = mc\Delta T = 100 \times 4.18 \times 18 = 7520\ \text{J}$. The amount burnt is $n = 0.50/32 = 0.0156\ \text{mol}$, so

    $$\Delta H_c = -\frac{q}{n} = -\frac{7520}{0.0156} \approx -480\ \text{kJ mol}^{-1}.$$
    An insulated cup of solution with a lid and a thermometer dipping in, used to measure the temperature change
    An insulated cup and a thermometer measure the temperature change of a known mass of solution
    Explore

    Exothermic and endothermic reactions

    Drag ΔH. An exothermic reaction releases energy (products lower); an endothermic one takes it in (products higher).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    enthalpy change 焓变 hán biàn
    exothermic 放热 fàng rè
    endothermic 吸热 xī rè
    reaction pathway diagram 反应路径图 fǎn yìng lù jìng tú
    activation energy 活化能 huó huà néng
    standard conditions 标准条件 biāo zhǔn tiáo jiàn
    enthalpy change of reaction 反应焓变 fǎn yìng hán biàn
    enthalpy change of formation 生成焓变 shēng chéng hán biàn
    enthalpy change of combustion 燃烧焓变 rán shāo hán biàn
    enthalpy change of neutralisation 中和焓变 zhōng hé hán biàn
    bond energy 键能 jiàn néng
    specific heat capacity 比热容 bǐ rè róng
    5.2

    Hess's law

    Syllabus
    1. apply Hess’s law to construct simple energy cycles
    2. carry out calculations using cycles and relevant energy terms, including: (a) determining enthalpy changes that cannot be found by direct experiment (b) use of bond energy data

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Hess's law 盖斯定律 says that the total enthalpy change for a reaction is the same, no matter which route you take from reactants to products. This is because energy is conserved.

    This lets you draw an energy cycle 能量循环: link the reactants and products by a direct step and by an indirect route, then add the steps so that both routes give the same total.

    A triangular Hess cycle linking reactants and products directly and through an intermediate, with the three enthalpy changes labelled
    The direct route equals the indirect route, so $\Delta H_r = \Delta H_1 + \Delta H_2$

    Hess's law is useful in two ways:

    • it lets you find an enthalpy change that you cannot measure directly (for example, the formation of a compound that forms slowly or with side reactions).
    • it lets you calculate $\Delta H_r$ from bond energy data, or from formation or combustion data given in the question.
    Explore

    Hess's law cycle

    Enthalpy change is the same whichever route you take — so an unknown ΔH can be found by an alternative path.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Hess's law 盖斯定律 gài sī dìng lǜ
    energy cycle 能量循环 néng liàng xún huán
    5.2

    Exam tips

    • Define each enthalpy change with its exact standard conditions (e.g. combustion = one mole burned completely in excess oxygen).
    • Use $\Delta H = \sum(\text{bonds broken}) - \sum(\text{bonds made})$; breaking is endothermic ($+$), making is exothermic ($-$) — getting the sign the wrong way round is the classic error.
    • In $q = mc\Delta T$ use the mass of the water/solution, then divide by moles and add the minus sign for an exothermic reaction.
    • Draw Hess cycles with arrows the same way round, follow the alternative route, and always give $\Delta H$ a sign and units ($\text{kJ mol}^{-1}$).
  • 6 Electrochemistry
    6.1

    Oxidation number

    Syllabus
    1. calculate oxidation numbers of elements in compounds and ions
    2. use changes in oxidation numbers to help balance chemical equations
    3. explain and use the terms redox, oxidation, reduction and disproportionation in terms of electron transfer and changes in oxidation number
    4. explain and use the terms oxidising agent and reducing agent
    5. use a Roman numeral to indicate the magnitude of the oxidation number of an element

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The oxidation number 氧化数 (also called the oxidation state) shows how many electrons 电子 an atom has lost or gained compared with the free element. You work it out using simple rules:

    • an uncombined element has an oxidation number of $0$.
    • a simple ion has an oxidation number equal to its charge (so $\text{Mg}^{2+}$ is $+2$).
    • Group 1 is always $+1$, Group 2 is always $+2$.
    • hydrogen is $+1$ (but $-1$ in metal hydrides).
    • oxygen is $-2$ (but $-1$ in peroxides).
    • fluorine is always $-1$.
    • the oxidation numbers in a neutral compound add up to $0$; in an ion they add up to the charge.

    A Roman numeral shows the size of the oxidation number of an element, for example iron(II) means $+2$ and manganese(VII) in $\text{KMnO}_4$ means $+7$.

    Working out the oxidation number of manganese in KMnO4: potassium is +1, the four oxygens give -8, and since they sum to zero, manganese must be +7
    Assigning an oxidation number: fix the known atoms (K = +1, O = −2 each), then use "they sum to zero" to find the unknown (Mn = +7)

    Worked example. Find the oxidation number of sulfur in the sulfate ion, $\text{SO}_4^{2-}$.

    Each oxygen is $-2$, so the four oxygens give $4 \times (-2) = -8$. In an ion the numbers add up to the charge, here $-2$. If sulfur is $x$:

    $$x + (-8) = -2 \quad\Rightarrow\quad x = +6.$$

    Worked example. Find the oxidation number of nitrogen in the nitrate ion, $\text{NO}_3^-$.

    $$x + 3 \times (-2) = -1 \quad\Rightarrow\quad x - 6 = -1 \quad\Rightarrow\quad x = +5.$$
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    oxidation number 氧化数 yǎng huà shù
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    6.1

    Redox in terms of electrons

    Several AA batteries
    A battery uses redox reactions to push electrons round a circuit.

    A redox 氧化还原 reaction is one where electrons move from one species to another.

    • oxidation 氧化 is the loss of electrons. The oxidation number goes up.
    • reduction 还原 is the gain of electrons. The oxidation number goes down.

    A useful memory aid is OIL RIG: Oxidation Is Loss, Reduction Is Gain.

    Oxidation and reduction always happen together, because the electrons lost by one species are gained by another. This electron transfer 电子转移 is why we call it a redox reaction.

    Zinc losing two electrons to become Zn2+ while copper ions gain them to become copper, with an arrow showing the electron transfer
    Redox is electron transfer: the reducing agent loses electrons (oxidised, number up); the oxidising agent gains them (reduced, number down)
    Explore

    Redox is electron transfer

    Step through it: the metal loses (is oxidised) and the non-metal gains (is reduced) — oxidation number rises for one, falls for the other.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    redox 氧化还原 yǎng huà huán yuán
    oxidation 氧化 yǎng huà
    reduction 还原 huán yuán
    electron transfer 电子转移 diàn zi zhuǎn yí
    6.1

    Using oxidation numbers to balance equations

    Changes in oxidation number help you balance a redox equation:

    1. find the element whose oxidation number rises (it is oxidised) and the one whose number falls (it is reduced).
    2. the total rise must equal the total fall, because every electron lost is gained somewhere.
    3. choose the ratio of the two species so the rise and fall match, then balance the rest of the equation.
    Iron rising from +2 to +3 by one and manganese falling from +7 to +2 by five, so five irons balance one permanganate
    Balancing a redox equation: the total rise in oxidation number must equal the total fall, which fixes the ratio

    Worked example. Balance the reaction of manganate(VII) with iron(II) in acid: $\text{MnO}_4^- + \text{Fe}^{2+} + \text{H}^+ \rightarrow \text{Mn}^{2+} + \text{Fe}^{3+} + \text{H}_2\text{O}$.

    Manganese falls from $+7$ to $+2$ (a fall of $5$); iron rises from $+2$ to $+3$ (a rise of $1$). To make the total fall equal the total rise, take $5$ iron ions for every $1$ manganate ion. Then balance oxygen with water ($4\,\text{H}_2\text{O}$) and hydrogen with $\text{H}^+$ ($8\,\text{H}^+$):

    $$\text{MnO}_4^- + 5\text{Fe}^{2+} + 8\text{H}^+ \rightarrow \text{Mn}^{2+} + 5\text{Fe}^{3+} + 4\text{H}_2\text{O}.$$
    6.1

    Disproportionation

    Disproportionation 歧化 is a special redox reaction in which the same element is both oxidised and reduced at the same time. For example, when chlorine reacts with cold water, some chlorine atoms are reduced (to $\text{Cl}^-$) and others are oxidised (to $\text{ClO}^-$).

    An oxidation-number line showing chlorine at 0 going up to +1 in ClO- and down to -1 in Cl-
    Disproportionation: chlorine ($0$) is both oxidised to ClO$^-$ ($+1$) and reduced to Cl$^-$ ($-1$) at once
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    disproportionation 歧化 qí huà
    6.1

    Oxidising and reducing agents

    Rust on an iron surface
    Rusting is the oxidation of iron by oxygen.
    • an oxidising agent 氧化剂 takes electrons away from another species. In doing so, it is itself reduced.
    • a reducing agent 还原剂 gives electrons to another species. In doing so, it is itself oxidised.

    So in any redox reaction, the oxidising agent causes the oxidation of the other species, while the reducing agent causes the reduction.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    oxidising agent 氧化剂 yǎng huà jì
    reducing agent 还原剂 huán yuán jì
    6.1

    Exam tips

    • Apply the oxidation-number rules in order: O is $-2$ except in peroxides ($-1$); H is $+1$ except in metal hydrides ($-1$).
    • In a redox equation the total increase equals the total decrease in oxidation number — use this to fix the ratio, then balance O with $\text{H}_2\text{O}$ and H with $\text{H}^+$.
    • An oxidising agent is itself reduced; name both what is oxidised/reduced and the agent for full marks.
    • Disproportionation is the same element both oxidised and reduced — show both oxidation-number changes.
  • 7 Equilibria
    7.1

    Reversible reactions and dynamic equilibrium

    Syllabus
    1. (a) understand what is meant by a reversible reaction (b) understand what is meant by dynamic equilibrium in terms of the rate of forward and reverse reactions being equal and the concentration of reactants and products remaining constant (c) understand the need for a closed system in order to establish dynamic equilibrium
    2. define Le Chatelier’s principle as: if a change is made to a system at dynamic equilibrium, the position of equilibrium moves to minimise this change
    3. use Le Chatelier’s principle to deduce qualitatively (from appropriate information) the effects of changes in temperature, concentration, pressure or presence of a catalyst on a system at equilibrium
    4. deduce expressions for equilibrium constants in terms of concentrations, $K_c$
    5. use the terms mole fraction and partial pressure
    6. deduce expressions for equilibrium constants in terms of partial pressures, $K_p$ (use of the relationship between $K_p$ and $K_c$ is not required)
    7. use the $K_c$ and $K_p$ expressions to carry out calculations (such calculations will not require the solving of quadratic equations)
    8. calculate the quantities present at equilibrium, given appropriate data
    9. state whether changes in temperature, concentration or pressure or the presence of a catalyst affect the value of the equilibrium constant for a reaction
    10. describe and explain the conditions used in the Haber process and the Contact process, as examples of the importance of an understanding of dynamic equilibrium in the chemical industry and the application of Le Chatelier’s principle

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Le Chatelier's principle
    Dynamic equilibrium: the rates converge
    Cobalt(II) chloride solutions of different colours
    Cobalt chloride changes colour as its equilibrium shifts.

    A reversible reaction 可逆反应 can go both ways. The forward reaction 正反应 makes products; the reverse reaction 逆反应 turns products back into reactants. We show this with the sign $\rightleftharpoons$.

    In a closed system 封闭系统 (nothing enters or leaves), the reaction reaches a dynamic equilibrium 动态平衡 when:

    • the rate of the forward reaction equals the rate of the reverse reaction.
    • the concentrations of reactants and products stay constant.

    It is called dynamic because both reactions are still happening — they just cancel out. A closed system is needed, or products would escape and equilibrium could never be reached.

    A graph where the forward rate falls and the reverse rate rises until the two meet and stay equal
    At dynamic equilibrium the forward and reverse rates have become equal, so the concentrations stay constant
    Explore

    Dynamic equilibrium

    forward rate = reverse rate

    At equilibrium the position can sit anywhere — change a condition and watch it shift.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    reversible reaction 可逆反应 kě nì fǎn yìng
    forward reaction 正反应 zhèng fǎn yìng
    reverse reaction 逆反应 nì fǎn yìng
    closed system 封闭系统 fēng bì xì tǒng
    dynamic equilibrium 动态平衡 dòng tài píng héng
    7.1

    Le Chatelier's principle

    Le Chatelier's principle 勒夏特列原理 says: if you change a system at equilibrium, the position of equilibrium 平衡 moves to oppose (reduce) that change.

    Change you make Which way the equilibrium moves
    increase concentration of a reactant towards the products
    increase pressure towards the side with fewer gas molecules
    increase temperature towards the endothermic direction
    add a catalyst 催化剂 no shift (it speeds up both ways equally)

    A catalyst lets equilibrium be reached faster, but it does not change the position of equilibrium.

    Three changes each with an arrow showing which way the equilibrium moves: add reactant towards products, raise pressure to the fewer-molecules side, raise temperature in the endothermic direction
    Le Chatelier's principle: the equilibrium always shifts to oppose the change you make
    Explore

    Shifting an equilibrium

    Change the temperature, pressure or concentration and watch the equilibrium shift to oppose your change — Le Chatelier's principle in action.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Le Chatelier's principle 勒夏特列原理 lēi xià tè liè yuán lǐ
    equilibrium 平衡 píng héng
    catalyst 催化剂 cuī huà jì
    7.1

    Equilibrium constants

    For a reaction at equilibrium, the equilibrium constant 平衡常数 links the amounts of products and reactants. For the reaction $a\text{A} + b\text{B} \rightleftharpoons c\text{C} + d\text{D}$:

    $$K_c = \frac{[\text{C}]^c\,[\text{D}]^d}{[\text{A}]^a\,[\text{B}]^b}$$

    where the square brackets mean concentration in $\text{mol dm}^{-3}$.

    Worked example. At equilibrium the mixture $\text{H}_2 + \text{I}_2 \rightleftharpoons 2\text{HI}$ has $[\text{H}_2] = 0.20$, $[\text{I}_2] = 0.20$ and $[\text{HI}] = 1.6\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}$. Find $K_c$.

    $$K_c = \frac{[\text{HI}]^2}{[\text{H}_2][\text{I}_2]} = \frac{1.6^2}{0.20 \times 0.20} = 64$$

    (no units here, because the concentration powers cancel top and bottom).

    Worked example (ICE table). $1.00\ \text{mol}$ each of $\text{H}_2$ and $\text{I}_2$ are sealed in a $1.00\ \text{dm}^3$ flask; at equilibrium $0.20\ \text{mol}$ of $\text{H}_2$ remains. Set out an ICE table (Initial, Change, Equilibrium):

    $\text{H}_2$ $\text{I}_2$ $2\text{HI}$
    Initial 1.00 1.00 0
    Change $-0.80$ $-0.80$ $+1.60$
    Equilibrium 0.20 0.20 1.60

    $0.80\ \text{mol}$ of $\text{H}_2$ reacted, so $2\times0.80 = 1.60\ \text{mol}$ HI formed. In the $1.00\ \text{dm}^3$ flask the concentrations equal the moles, so $K_c = \dfrac{1.60^2}{0.20\times0.20} = 64$.

    For reactions of gases, we use partial pressure 分压 instead of concentration. The partial pressure of a gas is the share of the total pressure that it provides. It is found from the mole fraction 摩尔分数 (the fraction of all the moles that are that gas):

    $$\text{partial pressure} = \text{mole fraction} \times \text{total pressure}$$

    The constant written with partial pressures is $K_p$.

    Worked example. A gas mixture holds $2.0\ \text{mol}$ of $\text{N}_2$ and $6.0\ \text{mol}$ of $\text{H}_2$ at a total pressure of $200\ \text{kPa}$. Find the partial pressure of each gas.

    There are $8.0\ \text{mol}$ in total, so

    $$p(\text{N}_2) = \frac{2.0}{8.0} \times 200 = 50\ \text{kPa}, \qquad p(\text{H}_2) = \frac{6.0}{8.0} \times 200 = 150\ \text{kPa}.$$

    Worked example (a numeric $K_p$). For $\text{N}_2 + 3\text{H}_2 \rightleftharpoons 2\text{NH}_3$ the equilibrium partial pressures are $p(\text{N}_2)=20$, $p(\text{H}_2)=40$ and $p(\text{NH}_3)=10\ \text{kPa}$. Then

    $$K_p = \frac{p(\text{NH}_3)^2}{p(\text{N}_2)\,p(\text{H}_2)^3} = \frac{10^2}{20\times40^3} = 7.8\times10^{-5}\ \text{kPa}^{-2},$$
    the units coming from $\dfrac{\text{kPa}^2}{\text{kPa}\times\text{kPa}^3}=\text{kPa}^{-2}$.

    Only temperature changes the value of $K_c$ or $K_p$. Changing concentration or pressure shifts the position of equilibrium but leaves the constant unchanged; adding a catalyst changes neither the constant nor the position — it only makes equilibrium arrive faster.

    Explore

    Le Chatelier and Kc

    Change temperature, pressure or concentration and watch the equilibrium shift to oppose it — Kc itself only changes with temperature.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    equilibrium constant 平衡常数 píng héng cháng shù
    partial pressure 分压 fēn yā
    mole fraction 摩尔分数 mó ěr fēn shù
    7.1

    The Haber and Contact processes

    A large industrial chemical complex
    Ammonia for fertiliser is made by the Haber process in large industrial plants like this one.

    These two industrial processes are chosen by balancing yield, rate and cost using Le Chatelier's principle.

    • the Haber process 哈伯法 makes ammonia: $\text{N}_2 + 3\text{H}_2 \rightleftharpoons 2\text{NH}_3$ (exothermic). It uses about $450\,°\text{C}$, $200\ \text{atm}$ and an iron catalyst. A low temperature would give more ammonia but too slowly, so a moderate temperature is a compromise.
    • the Contact process 接触法 makes sulfur trioxide: $2\text{SO}_2 + \text{O}_2 \rightleftharpoons 2\text{SO}_3$ (exothermic). It uses about $450\,°\text{C}$, near $1$$2\ \text{atm}$ and a vanadium(V) oxide catalyst.
    A graph of ammonia yield against temperature for three pressures, yield falling with temperature and rising with pressure, with the operating point marked
    The Haber equilibrium gives more ammonia at lower temperature and higher pressure; about $450\,°$C and $200$ atm is the working compromise
    Explore

    The Haber & Contact processes

    compromise: yield vs rate

    High pressure boosts yield; high temperature speeds it up but lowers yield — a compromise.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Haber process 哈伯法 hā bó fǎ
    Contact process 接触法 jiē chù fǎ
    7.2

    Acids and bases: the Brønsted–Lowry theory

    Syllabus
    1. state the names and formulas of the common acids, limited to hydrochloric acid, $\text{HCl}$, sulfuric acid, $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$, nitric acid, $\text{HNO}_3$, ethanoic acid, $\text{CH}_3\text{COOH}$
    2. state the names and formulas of the common alkalis, limited to sodium hydroxide, $\text{NaOH}$, potassium hydroxide, $\text{KOH}$, ammonia, $\text{NH}_3$
    3. describe the Brønsted–Lowry theory of acids and bases
    4. describe strong acids and strong bases as fully dissociated in aqueous solution and weak acids and weak bases as partially dissociated in aqueous solution
    5. appreciate that water has pH of 7, acid solutions pH of below 7 and alkaline solutions pH of above 7
    6. explain qualitatively the differences in behaviour between strong and weak acids including the reaction with a reactive metal and difference in pH values by use of a pH meter, universal indicator or conductivity
    7. understand that neutralisation reactions occur when $\text{H}^+(\text{aq})$ and $\text{OH}^-(\text{aq})$ form $\text{H}_2\text{O}(\text{l})$
    8. understand that salts are formed in neutralisation reactions
    9. sketch the pH titration curves of titrations using combinations of strong and weak acids with strong and weak alkalis
    10. select suitable indicators for acid-alkali titrations, given appropriate data ($\text{p}K_a$ values will not be used)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A proton 质子 is simply an $\text{H}^+$ ion. The Brønsted–Lowry theory defines acids and bases by what they do with protons:

    • an acid is a proton donor 质子供体 (it gives away $\text{H}^+$).
    • a base is a proton acceptor 质子受体 (it takes $\text{H}^+$). A base that dissolves in water is called an alkali.
    Hydrogen chloride donating a proton to a water molecule, forming a hydroxonium ion and a chloride ion, with the two conjugate pairs marked
    Brønsted–Lowry: the acid donates a proton ($\text{H}^+$) to the base, making two conjugate acid–base pairs

    Common acids you must know: hydrochloric acid ($\text{HCl}$), sulfuric acid ($\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$), nitric acid ($\text{HNO}_3$) and ethanoic acid ($\text{CH}_3\text{COOH}$). Common alkalis: sodium hydroxide ($\text{NaOH}$), potassium hydroxide ($\text{KOH}$) and ammonia ($\text{NH}_3$).

    Explore

    The pH scale

    Slide the pH or tap a substance — each step down in pH means ten times more H⁺ ions; acids are below 7, alkalis above.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    proton 质子 zhì zi
    acid suān
    proton donor 质子供体 zhì zi gōng tǐ
    base jiǎn
    proton acceptor 质子受体 zhì zi shòu tǐ
    7.2

    Strong and weak acids and bases

    This is about how fully an acid or base splits up in water — not how concentrated it is.

    • a strong acid 强酸 or strong base 强碱 is fully dissociated 解离 in water (almost every molecule splits into ions).
    • a weak acid 弱酸 or weak base 弱碱 is only partly dissociated (most molecules stay whole).
    Two beakers at the same concentration: the strong acid full of separate ions, the weak acid full of whole molecules with only a few ions
    Same concentration, different ionisation: a strong acid is fully dissociated into ions; a weak acid stays mostly as whole molecules

    The pH scale measures how acidic a solution is: pure water is pH 7, acids are below 7, and alkalis are above 7. A strong acid has a lower pH than a weak acid of the same concentration.

    You can tell strong and weak acids apart by:

    • reaction with a reactive metal: a strong acid fizzes faster.
    • pH: measured with a pH meter or universal indicator 通用指示剂.
    • electrical conductivity: a strong acid conducts better, because it has more ions.
    Explore

    Strong vs weak acids

    A strong acid fully ionises (low pH); a weak acid only partly ionises, so at the same concentration its pH is higher. Slide to compare.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    strong acid 强酸 qiáng suān
    strong base 强碱 qiáng jiǎn
    dissociated 解离 jiě lí
    weak acid 弱酸 ruò suān
    weak base 弱碱 ruò jiǎn
    universal indicator 通用指示剂 tōng yòng zhǐ shì jì
    7.2

    Neutralisation, salts and titration curves

    Neutralisation 中和 happens when the hydrogen ions from an acid react with the hydroxide ions from an alkali:

    $$\text{H}^+(\text{aq}) + \text{OH}^-(\text{aq}) \rightarrow \text{H}_2\text{O}(\text{l})$$

    A salt is also formed, from the rest of the acid and base.

    In a titration 滴定 you add one solution to another and follow the pH. The titration curve 滴定曲线 has a steep, almost vertical jump near the end point. The exact shape depends on whether each reactant is strong or weak.

    To pick an indicator 指示剂, choose one whose colour change falls inside that steep jump. For a strong acid with a strong base most indicators work; for a weak acid with a strong base you need one that changes in the higher pH range.

    Two titration curves of pH against base added, each with a steep jump at the end point; the weak-acid curve jumps over a higher pH range, with an indicator band shaded
    Titration curves each have a steep pH jump at the end point. The weak-acid jump sits higher, so the indicator must change colour in that range
    Explore

    A titration curve

    Add alkali to acid and watch the pH climb. The steep jump is the equivalence point, where the acid is just neutralised.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Neutralisation 中和 zhōng hé
    salt yán
    titration 滴定 dī dìng
    titration curve 滴定曲线 dī dìng qū xiàn
    indicator 指示剂 zhǐ shì jì
    7.2

    Exam tips

    • Define dynamic equilibrium with all three points: forward and reverse rates equal, concentrations constant, closed system.
    • Answer Le Chatelier questions by stating the change, the direction of shift, and the reason; a catalyst does not shift the position (it speeds both rates).
    • Write $K_c$ as products over reactants, each raised to its balancing number; include state symbols to decide what appears.
    • Justify Haber/Contact conditions as a compromise between yield, rate and cost — do not just quote them.
    • Brønsted: acid = proton donor, base = proton acceptor; conjugate pairs differ by one $\text{H}^+$.
  • 8 Reaction kinetics
    8.1

    Rate of reaction

    Syllabus
    1. explain and use the term rate of reaction, frequency of collisions, effective collisions and non-effective collisions
    2. explain qualitatively, in terms of frequency of effective collisions, the effect of concentration and pressure changes on the rate of a reaction
    3. use experimental data to calculate the rate of a reaction

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Collision theory: energy and orientation

    The rate of reaction 反应速率 is how fast reactants turn into products. We measure it as the change in concentration (or amount) in each unit of time.

    To react, particles must collide 碰撞. The collision frequency 碰撞频率 is how often the particles hit each other. But not every collision leads to a reaction:

    • an effective collision 有效碰撞 has enough energy and the correct direction, so a reaction happens.
    • a non-effective collision 无效碰撞 does not have enough energy, or the particles hit at the wrong angle, so nothing happens.

    So the rate depends on the frequency of effective collisions — how many useful collisions happen each second.

    Two molecules colliding: when their reactive ends line up a reaction happens, but with the wrong orientation there is no reaction
    A collision only reacts with the right orientation and enough energy (coloured ends = the reactive part)

    Concentration and pressure

    If you increase the concentration of a solution (or the pressure of a gas), the particles are packed closer together. They collide more often, so there are more effective collisions each second, and the rate goes up.

    Two boxes of the same size, the second holding more particles, which therefore collide more often
    More particles in the same volume collide more often, so the rate rises

    You can calculate a rate from experimental data — for example, the volume of gas made divided by the time taken.

    Worked example. A reaction gives off carbon dioxide. In the first $30\ \text{s}$, $48\ \text{cm}^3$ of gas is collected. Find the average rate of reaction over this time.

    $$\text{average rate} = \frac{\text{volume of gas}}{\text{time}} = \frac{48}{30} = 1.6\ \text{cm}^3\,\text{s}^{-1}.$$

    The rate is fastest at the start (the graph is steepest there) because the reactants are most concentrated, then it slows as they are used up.

    Explore

    Rate of reaction

    [A] = [A]₀·b

    Reactant concentration falls over time as it's used up.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    rate of reaction 反应速率 fǎn yìng sù lǜ
    collide 碰撞 pèng zhuàng
    collision frequency 碰撞频率 pèng zhuàng pín lǜ
    effective collision 有效碰撞 yǒu xiào pèng zhuàng
    non-effective collision 无效碰撞 wú xiào pèng zhuàng
    8.2

    Temperature and activation energy

    Syllabus
    1. define activation energy, $E_A$, as the minimum energy required for a collision to be effective
    2. sketch and use the Boltzmann distribution to explain the significance of activation energy
    3. explain qualitatively, in terms both of the Boltzmann distribution and of frequency of effective collisions, the effect of temperature change on the rate of a reaction

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution

    The activation energy 活化能 ($E_A$) is the minimum energy a collision needs in order to be effective.

    The Boltzmann distribution 玻尔兹曼分布 is a graph showing how the energies of the molecules are spread out at one temperature. The curve starts at the origin, rises to a peak, then falls away in a long tail. The total area under the curve is the total number of molecules. Only the molecules to the right of $E_A$ have enough energy to react.

    When you raise the temperature:

    • the curve flattens and spreads to the right, so a much larger fraction of molecules now have energy greater than $E_A$.
    • the molecules also move faster and collide more often.

    The first effect is the bigger one. This is why a small rise in temperature gives a large rise in rate.

    Boltzmann distribution curves at a lower and a higher temperature, with the activation energy marked and the reacting fraction shaded
    At higher temperature the curve spreads to the right, so a larger fraction of molecules can react
    Explore

    Why heat speeds up reactions

    Raise the temperature: the curve spreads right, so more molecules have at least the activation energy and can react.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    activation energy 活化能 huó huà néng
    Boltzmann distribution 玻尔兹曼分布 bō ěr zī màn fēn bù
    8.3

    Catalysts

    Syllabus
    1. explain and use the terms catalyst and catalysis: (a) explain that, in the presence of a catalyst, a reaction has a different mechanism, i.e. one of lower activation energy (b) explain this catalytic effect in terms of the Boltzmann distribution (c) construct and interpret a reaction pathway diagram, for a reaction in the presence and absence of an effective catalyst

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Reaction profile: a catalyst's lower-energy route

    A catalyst 催化剂 speeds up a reaction but is not used up itself. Catalysis 催化作用 is the name for this action.

    A catalyst works by giving the reaction a different reaction mechanism 反应机理 — a new route with a lower activation energy. On the Boltzmann distribution, lowering $E_A$ moves the line to the left, so more molecules now have enough energy. This means more effective collisions each second, and a faster rate.

    On a reaction pathway diagram 反应路径图, the catalysed route has a lower energy "hill". The enthalpy change of the reaction, $\Delta H$, is not changed by the catalyst.

    Reaction pathway diagram comparing the catalysed and uncatalysed routes, with a lower activation energy hill for the catalysed route and the same enthalpy change
    A catalyst gives a route with lower activation energy; the enthalpy change is unchanged

    There are two types:

    • a homogeneous catalyst 均相催化剂 is in the same physical state as the reactants — for example, an acid catalyst dissolved in a solution of liquids.
    • a heterogeneous catalyst 多相催化剂 is in a different state from the reactants — for example, solid iron speeding up the reaction of gases in the Haber process.
    Two panels: a homogeneous catalyst mixed in with the reactant particles in the same state, and a heterogeneous catalyst as a separate solid surface with reactants above it
    A homogeneous catalyst is mixed in with the reactants (same state); a heterogeneous catalyst is a separate surface (different state), where reactants meet and react
    A cylindrical catalytic converter block with a fine honeycomb surface — a real heterogeneous catalyst
    A car's catalytic converter is a heterogeneous catalyst; its honeycomb gives a huge surface area
    Explore

    Catalysts

    a catalyst lowers Ea

    A catalyst lowers Ea, so a bigger fraction of molecules can react — without heating.

    Explore

    How a catalyst works

    Add a catalyst and watch the activation-energy barrier drop — it gives an easier route, without changing ΔH.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    catalyst 催化剂 cuī huà jì
    catalysis 催化作用 cuī huà zuò yòng
    reaction mechanism 反应机理 fǎn yìng jī lǐ
    reaction pathway diagram 反应路径图 fǎn yìng lù jìng tú
    homogeneous catalyst 均相催化剂 jūn xiāng cuī huà jì
    heterogeneous catalyst 多相催化剂 duō xiāng cuī huà jì
    8.3

    Exam tips

    • Explain rate changes with collision theory — more frequent and/or more energetic effective collisions.
    • On a Boltzmann distribution mark $E_A$, shade to its right, and show the curve flatten and shift right at higher temperature; it starts at the origin and never touches the axis.
    • A catalyst gives an alternative route with lower $E_A$ and does not change $\Delta H$.
    • Say why a small temperature rise gives a large rate rise: a much greater proportion of molecules now exceed $E_A$ (the main effect).
  • 9 The Periodic Table: chemical periodicity
    9.1

    Physical properties across Period 3

    Syllabus
    1. describe qualitatively (and indicate the periodicity in) the variations in atomic radius, ionic radius, melting point and electrical conductivity of the elements
    2. explain the variation in melting point and electrical conductivity in terms of the structure and bonding of the elements

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A periodic table display
    Properties repeat in a regular pattern across each period of the table.

    Periodicity 周期性 means that properties repeat in a regular pattern as you go across each period 周期 of the Periodic Table. Period 3 (Na to Ar) is the standard example.

    A row of atoms from sodium to chlorine shrinking from left to right, with nuclear charge rising from +11 to +17
    Atomic radius decreases across Period 3: the rising nuclear charge pulls the same outer shell inwards
    Property Trend across Period 3
    atomic radius 原子半径 gets smaller (more nuclear charge pulls the same shell in)
    ionic radius 离子半径 positive ions are small; from $\text{P}^{3-}$ onwards the negative ions are larger
    melting point 熔点 rises to a peak at silicon, then falls sharply
    electrical conductivity 导电性 high for Na, Mg, Al; almost zero from Si onwards

    The melting point and conductivity follow from the structure and bonding:

    • Na, Mg, Al are giant metallic 金属晶体. Melting points rise (Na → Al) because each atom gives more delocalised electrons and the ions get smaller, so the bonding is stronger. They conduct well.
    • Si is giant molecular 原子晶体 (giant covalent). It has the highest melting point, because strong covalent bonds must be broken. It barely conducts.
    • P, S, Cl, Ar are simple molecular 分子晶体 (or single atoms). Their melting points are low, because the only forces that break are the weak van der Waals' forces 范德华力 between the molecules - the strong covalent bonds inside each molecule are never broken at all. They do not conduct.

    Name van der Waals' forces when you explain that drop: it is the marking point, and "the covalent bonds are weak" is the error that loses it. Melting $\text{S}_8$ pulls whole molecules apart from each other; it does not touch a single $\text{S–S}$ bond. Their sizes still follow the molecule: $\text{S}_8$ melts higher than $\text{P}_4$ because it is bigger, with more electrons and so stronger van der Waals' forces, while $\text{Ar}$ (a single atom) is lowest of all.

    A graph of melting point across Period 3 rising through the metals to a sharp peak at silicon, then dropping to the simple molecular elements
    Melting point across Period 3 peaks at silicon (giant covalent); it is high for the metals and low for the simple molecular elements
    Explore

    Trends across Period 3

    Switch between atomic radius, ionisation energy and melting point, and step across Period 3 to see each periodic trend.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    periodicity 周期性 zhōu qī xìng
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    atomic radius 原子半径 yuán zi bàn jìng
    ionic radius 离子半径 lí zi bàn jìng
    melting point 熔点 róng diǎn
    electrical conductivity 导电性 dǎo diàn xìng
    giant metallic 金属晶体 jīn shǔ jīng tǐ
    giant molecular 原子晶体 yuán zi jīng tǐ
    simple molecular 分子晶体 fēn zǐ jīng tǐ
    van der Waals' forces 范德华力 fàn dé huá lì
    9.2

    Chemical properties across Period 3

    Syllabus
    1. describe, and write equations for, the reactions of the elements with oxygen (to give $\text{Na}_2\text{O}$, $\text{MgO}$, $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$, $\text{P}_4\text{O}_{10}$, $\text{SO}_2$), chlorine (to give $\text{NaCl}$, $\text{MgCl}_2$, $\text{AlCl}_3$, $\text{SiCl}_4$, $\text{PCl}_5$) and water ($\text{Na}$ and $\text{Mg}$ only)
    2. state and explain the variation in the oxidation number of the oxides ($\text{Na}_2\text{O}$, $\text{MgO}$, $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$, $\text{P}_4\text{O}_{10}$, $\text{SO}_2$ and $\text{SO}_3$ only) and chlorides ($\text{NaCl}$, $\text{MgCl}_2$, $\text{AlCl}_3$, $\text{SiCl}_4$, $\text{PCl}_5$ only) in terms of their outer shell (valence shell) electrons
    3. describe, and write equations for, the reactions, if any, of the oxides $\text{Na}_2\text{O}$, $\text{MgO}$, $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$, $\text{SiO}_2$, $\text{P}_4\text{O}_{10}$, $\text{SO}_2$ and $\text{SO}_3$ with water including the likely pHs of the solutions obtained
    4. describe, explain, and write equations for, the acid/base behaviour of the oxides $\text{Na}_2\text{O}$, $\text{MgO}$, $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$, $\text{P}_4\text{O}_{10}$, $\text{SO}_2$ and $\text{SO}_3$ and the hydroxides $\text{NaOH}$, $\text{Mg(OH)}_2$ and $\text{Al(OH)}_3$ including, where relevant, amphoteric behaviour in reactions with acids and bases (sodium hydroxide only)
    5. describe, explain, and write equations for, the reactions of the chlorides $\text{NaCl}$, $\text{MgCl}_2$, $\text{AlCl}_3$, $\text{SiCl}_4$, $\text{PCl}_5$ with water including the likely pHs of the solutions obtained
    6. explain the variations and trends in 9.2.2, 9.2.3, 9.2.4 and 9.2.5 in terms of bonding and electronegativity
    7. suggest the types of chemical bonding present in the chlorides and oxides from observations of their chemical and physical properties

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Reactions with oxygen, chlorine and water

    With oxygen:

    $$4\text{Na} + \text{O}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{Na}_2\text{O} \qquad 2\text{Mg} + \text{O}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{MgO} \qquad 4\text{Al} + 3\text{O}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$$
    $$\text{P}_4 + 5\text{O}_2 \rightarrow \text{P}_4\text{O}_{10} \qquad \text{S} + \text{O}_2 \rightarrow \text{SO}_2$$

    With chlorine:

    $$2\text{Na} + \text{Cl}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{NaCl} \qquad \text{Mg} + \text{Cl}_2 \rightarrow \text{MgCl}_2 \qquad 2\text{Al} + 3\text{Cl}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{AlCl}_3$$
    $$\text{Si} + 2\text{Cl}_2 \rightarrow \text{SiCl}_4 \qquad 2\text{P} + 5\text{Cl}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{PCl}_5$$

    With water (only Na and Mg react):

    $$2\text{Na} + 2\text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow 2\text{NaOH} + \text{H}_2 \qquad \text{Mg} + 2\text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow \text{Mg(OH)}_2 + \text{H}_2$$

    Sodium reacts fast; magnesium reacts only very slowly with cold water.

    Oxidation number of the oxides and chlorides

    The oxidation number 氧化数 of the Period 3 element in its oxide or chloride rises across the period, because it equals the number of outer-shell (valence shell 价层) electrons 电子 the atom uses in bonding:

    Oxides $\text{Na}_2\text{O}$ $\text{MgO}$ $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$ $\text{P}_4\text{O}_{10}$ $\text{SO}_2$ / $\text{SO}_3$
    oxidation number $+1$ $+2$ $+3$ $+5$ $+4$ / $+6$

    The chlorides $\text{NaCl}$, $\text{MgCl}_2$, $\text{AlCl}_3$, $\text{SiCl}_4$, $\text{PCl}_5$ show oxidation numbers $+1$ to $+5$ in the same way.

    Oxides with water, and acid–base behaviour

    Across the period the oxides 氧化物 change from basic to acidic:

    A coloured bar split into basic, amphoteric and acidic regions, with the Period 3 oxides placed along it from Na2O to SO3 and approximate pH values
    The Period 3 oxides change from basic (the metals) through amphoteric (Al$_2$O$_3$) to acidic (the non-metals)
    Oxide With water Acid–base nature Approximate pH
    $\text{Na}_2\text{O}$ $\text{Na}_2\text{O} + \text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow 2\text{NaOH}$ basic 13–14
    $\text{MgO}$ $\text{MgO} + \text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow \text{Mg(OH)}_2$ basic 9–10
    $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$ insoluble amphoteric 两性 7
    $\text{SiO}_2$ insoluble weakly acidic 7
    $\text{P}_4\text{O}_{10}$ $\text{P}_4\text{O}_{10} + 6\text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow 4\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$ acidic 1–2
    $\text{SO}_3$ $\text{SO}_3 + \text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow \text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ strongly acidic 0–1

    Metal oxides (left) are basic; non-metal oxides (right) are acidic. $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$ and its hydroxide 氢氧化物 $\text{Al(OH)}_3$ are amphoteric — they react with both acids and bases:

    $$\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3 + 6\text{HCl} \rightarrow 2\text{AlCl}_3 + 3\text{H}_2\text{O}$$
    $$\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3 + 2\text{NaOH} + 3\text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow 2\text{NaAl(OH)}_4$$
    Aluminium oxide in the centre reacting to the left with acid and to the right with base
    Aluminium oxide is amphoteric — it reacts with acids (behaving as a base) and with bases (behaving as an acid)

    Chlorides with water

    • $\text{NaCl}$ and $\text{MgCl}_2$ are ionic. They simply dissolve, giving a near-neutral solution.
    • $\text{SiCl}_4$ and $\text{PCl}_5$ are covalent. They undergo hydrolysis 水解 (react with water) to make acidic solutions and fumes of $\text{HCl}$:
    $$\text{SiCl}_4 + 2\text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow \text{SiO}_2 + 4\text{HCl} \qquad \text{PCl}_5 + 4\text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow \text{H}_3\text{PO}_4 + 5\text{HCl}$$
    Two routes: the ionic chlorides dissolve to a neutral solution, while the covalent chlorides hydrolyse to an acidic solution and HCl fumes
    The ionic chlorides just dissolve (neutral); the covalent chlorides react with water (hydrolyse) to give an acidic solution and HCl fumes

    Explaining the trends

    These trends follow from the change in bonding and electronegativity 电负性. On the left, the elements are metals with low electronegativity, so their oxides and chlorides are ionic and basic (or neutral). On the right, the elements are non-metals with high electronegativity, so their oxides and chlorides are covalent and acidic. You can use a chloride's or oxide's properties (melting point, conductivity, effect on water) to suggest whether its bonding is ionic or covalent.

    Worked example. Predict the pH when $\text{Na}_2\text{O}$, $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$ and $\text{SO}_3$ are each added to water. Acid-base character follows the metal to non-metal change across Period 3. $\text{Na}_2\text{O}$ is ionic and basic: it dissolves to give $\text{NaOH}$, so the pH is about 13. $\text{SO}_3$ is covalent and acidic: it reacts to give $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$, so the pH is about 1. $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$ sits at the changeover - it is amphoteric and essentially insoluble in water, so the pH stays about 7. The trap is that last one: amphoteric does not mean neutral, it means the oxide reacts with acids and with alkalis - it simply does not react with water.

    Explore

    Period 3 reaction lab

    Classify Period 3 reactions by what they reveal about bonding and acidity.

    Explore

    Oxide and chloride hydrolysis route

    Follow how Period 3 oxides and chlorides change pH in water.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    oxidation number 氧化数 yǎng huà shù
    valence shell 价层 jià céng
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    oxide 氧化物 yǎng huà wù
    amphoteric 两性 liǎng xìng
    hydroxide 氢氧化物 qīng yǎng huà wù
    hydrolysis 水解 shuǐ jiě
    electronegativity 电负性 diàn fù xìng
    9.3

    Periodicity of other elements

    Syllabus
    1. predict the characteristic properties of an element in a given group by using knowledge of chemical periodicity
    2. deduce the nature, possible position in the Periodic Table and identity of unknown elements from given information about physical and chemical properties

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The same idea works for any group. If you know the pattern down a group and across a period, you can:

    • predict the properties of an element from its position (for example, a Group 1 element will be a reactive metal forming a $+1$ ion).
    • deduce the likely position and identity of an unknown element from its physical and chemical properties.
    Explore

    Periodic trends

    Step across Period 3 to see a property rise or fall, then repeat in the next period — that recurring pattern is periodicity.

    9.3

    Exam tips

    • Always pair the trend with its reason: atomic radius falls across Period 3 (rising nuclear charge, similar shielding).
    • Explain the melting-point pattern by structure: giant metallic (Na→Al), giant covalent (Si, highest), then simple molecular ($\text{P}_4$, $\text{S}_8$, $\text{Cl}_2$) and monatomic (Ar).
    • Oxides go basic → amphoteric ($\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$) → acidic across the period; link to ionic-to-covalent bonding.
    • For reactions of oxides/chlorides with water, give the products and the resulting pH.
  • 10 Group 2
    10.1

    The Group 2 metals

    Syllabus
    1. describe, and write equations for, the reactions of the elements with oxygen, water and dilute hydrochloric and sulfuric acids
    2. describe, and write equations for, the reactions of the oxides, hydroxides and carbonates with water and dilute hydrochloric and sulfuric acids
    3. describe, and write equations for, the thermal decomposition of the nitrates and carbonates, to include the trend in thermal stabilities
    4. describe, and make predictions from, the trends in physical and chemical properties of the elements involved in the reactions in 10.1.1 and the compounds involved in 10.1.2, 10.1.3 and 10.1.5
    5. state the variation in the solubilities of the hydroxides and sulfates

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Coastal limestone cliffs of calcium carbonate
    Limestone is calcium carbonate — a compound of the Group 2 metal calcium.

    Group 2 holds the metals magnesium, calcium, strontium and barium. They all have two outer electrons, which they lose to form $2+$ ions. Going down the group, the atoms get larger and the outer electrons are easier to lose, so the metals get more reactive — their reactivity 反应活性 increases down the group.

    Group 2 atoms growing larger from magnesium down to barium, beside a downward arrow labelled reactivity increases
    Reactivity increases down Group 2: larger atoms hold their two outer electrons less tightly, so they are lost more easily

    Reactions of the elements

    With oxygen, they burn to form an oxide:

    $$2\text{Mg} + \text{O}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{MgO}$$
    A strip of magnesium held in pliers burns with a dazzling white light, giving off white smoke of magnesium oxide
    Magnesium burns in air with a brilliant white flame, forming white magnesium oxide

    With water, they form a hydroxide and hydrogen. The reaction gets faster down the group:

    $$\text{Ca} + 2\text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow \text{Ca(OH)}_2 + \text{H}_2$$

    Magnesium is slow with cold water but reacts fast with steam, giving $\text{MgO}$ and $\text{H}_2$.

    With dilute hydrochloric or sulfuric acid, they form a salt and hydrogen:

    $$\text{Mg} + 2\text{HCl} \rightarrow \text{MgCl}_2 + \text{H}_2 \qquad \text{Mg} + \text{H}_2\text{SO}_4 \rightarrow \text{MgSO}_4 + \text{H}_2$$

    With sulfuric acid the reaction slows down the group, because the sulfates 硫酸盐 formed (such as $\text{BaSO}_4$) are insoluble and coat the metal.

    Reactions of the compounds

    The oxides 氧化物 and hydroxides 氢氧化物 are basic. They react with water and with dilute acids:

    $$\text{MgO} + \text{H}_2\text{O} \rightarrow \text{Mg(OH)}_2 \qquad \text{Mg(OH)}_2 + 2\text{HCl} \rightarrow \text{MgCl}_2 + 2\text{H}_2\text{O}$$

    The carbonates 碳酸盐 react with dilute acids to give a salt, water and carbon dioxide:

    $$\text{CaCO}_3 + 2\text{HCl} \rightarrow \text{CaCl}_2 + \text{H}_2\text{O} + \text{CO}_2$$

    Thermal decomposition

    Thermal decomposition 热分解 means breaking a compound apart by heating it.

    • the carbonates break into the oxide and carbon dioxide:
    $$\text{CaCO}_3 \rightarrow \text{CaO} + \text{CO}_2$$
    • the nitrates 硝酸盐 break into the oxide, brown nitrogen dioxide gas and oxygen:
    $$2\text{Ca(NO}_3)_2 \rightarrow 2\text{CaO} + 4\text{NO}_2 + \text{O}_2$$

    The thermal stability 热稳定性 of both the carbonates and the nitrates increases down the group. A larger metal ion pulls less on the carbonate or nitrate ion, so the compound is harder to break apart — it needs a higher temperature. So magnesium carbonate decomposes most easily, and barium carbonate is the hardest.

    A small magnesium ion strongly distorting a carbonate ion next to a large barium ion that barely distorts it
    Thermal stability rises down the group: a small cation polarises (distorts) the carbonate ion more, weakening it so it decomposes more easily

    Trends in solubility

    Compound Trend in solubility 溶解度 down the group
    hydroxides increase (Mg(OH)$_2$ almost insoluble; Ba(OH)$_2$ soluble)
    sulfates decrease (MgSO$_4$ soluble; BaSO$_4$ insoluble)
    Two log-scale lines crossing: hydroxide solubility rising from Mg to Ba and sulfate solubility falling
    Down Group 2 the hydroxides become more soluble while the sulfates become less soluble (note the log scale)

    From these trends you can predict the properties of the next element down, radium, and of its compounds.

    Worked example. $\text{MgCO}_3$ decomposes at about $540\ °\text{C}$ and $\text{BaCO}_3$ at about $1360\ °\text{C}$. Explain the trend and predict where $\text{CaCO}_3$ sits. Going down Group 2 the cation gets larger, so its charge is spread over a bigger surface and its polarising power falls. A less polarising cation distorts the carbonate ion less, so the $\text{C-O}$ bond is weakened less and more heat is needed to break it. Thermal stability therefore increases down the group, and $\text{CaCO}_3$, lying between Mg and Ba, decomposes at an intermediate temperature of about $900\ °\text{C}$. Argue the whole chain - cation size, then polarising power, then distortion of the anion; "it is more reactive" explains nothing here.

    Explore

    Group 2 reactivity ladder

    Move down Group 2 and see why reactions become more vigorous.

    Explore

    Group 2 trend lab

    Compare thermal stability and solubility trends down Group 2.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    group
    reactivity 反应活性 fǎn yìng huó xìng
    sulfate 硫酸盐 liú suān yán
    oxide 氧化物 yǎng huà wù
    hydroxide 氢氧化物 qīng yǎng huà wù
    carbonate 碳酸盐 tàn suān yán
    thermal decomposition 热分解 rè fēn jiě
    nitrate 硝酸盐 xiāo suān yán
    thermal stability 热稳定性 rè wěn dìng xìng
    solubility 溶解度 róng jiě dù
    10.1

    Exam tips

    • Reactivity increases down Group 2: ionisation energy falls as atoms get larger, so electrons are lost more easily.
    • Reactions with water become more vigorous down the group; Mg reacts slowly with cold water but fast with steam (→ MgO).
    • Hydroxides get more soluble down the group; sulfates get less soluble ($\text{BaSO}_4$ insoluble — the basis of the sulfate test).
    • Write equations with the correct $+2$ ion and state the observations (fizzing, dissolving).
  • 11 Group 17
    11.1

    Physical properties of the halogens

    Syllabus
    1. describe the colours and the trend in volatility of chlorine, bromine and iodine
    2. describe and explain the trend in the bond strength of the halogen molecules
    3. interpret the volatility of the elements in terms of instantaneous dipole–induced dipole forces

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Bromine: a dark liquid giving off an orange vapour in a sealed ampoule
    Bromine is a Group 17 halogen — a dark liquid that gives off an orange vapour.

    The halogens 卤素 are the Group 17 elements. They exist as diatomic molecules ($\text{Cl}_2$, $\text{Br}_2$, $\text{I}_2$). Going down the group:

    Element Colour and state at room temperature
    chlorine pale green gas
    bromine red-brown liquid
    iodine grey-black solid (purple vapour)

    The volatility 挥发性 (how easily a substance turns to vapour) decreases down the group: chlorine is a gas, but iodine is a solid. This is because the molecules get larger and have more electrons, so the instantaneous dipole 瞬时偶极 and induced dipole 诱导偶极 forces between them get stronger. Stronger forces are harder to break, so the boiling point rises and volatility falls.

    Three gas jars: chlorine as a pale green gas, bromine as a red-brown liquid, iodine as a grey-black solid
    Down Group 17 the halogens change from a pale green gas to a red-brown liquid to a grey-black solid as volatility falls

    The bond energy 键能 (bond strength) of the $\text{X}\text{–}\text{X}$ molecules generally falls from $\text{Cl}_2$ to $\text{I}_2$, because the shared electrons are further from the nuclei in the larger atoms.

    Explore

    Halogen physical trend lab

    Follow halogens down the group and link state, colour and volatility.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    halogen 卤素 lǔ sù
    group
    volatility 挥发性 huī fā xìng
    instantaneous dipole 瞬时偶极 shùn shí ǒu jí
    induced dipole 诱导偶极 yòu dǎo ǒu jí
    bond energy 键能 jiàn néng
    11.2

    Chemical properties of the halogens and hydrogen halides

    Syllabus
    1. describe the relative reactivity of the elements as oxidising agents
    2. describe the reactions of the elements with hydrogen and explain their relative reactivity in these reactions
    3. describe the relative thermal stabilities of the hydrogen halides and explain these in terms of bond strengths

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Halogens as oxidising agents

    Each halogen reacts by gaining one electron to form a $1-$ ion, so it acts as an oxidising agent 氧化剂. This power decreases down the group, because the larger atoms attract an extra electron less strongly. A more reactive halogen can push out a less reactive one from its salt:

    Chlorine added to colourless potassium bromide turns the solution orange as bromine is displaced
    Chlorine displaces bromine: the solution turns orange
    $$\text{Cl}_2 + 2\text{KBr} \rightarrow 2\text{KCl} + \text{Br}_2$$

    Reactions with hydrogen

    Each halogen reacts with hydrogen to form a hydrogen halide 卤化氢:

    $$\text{H}_2 + \text{Cl}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{HCl}$$

    The reaction gets less vigorous down the group: chlorine reacts explosively in light, bromine needs heat, and iodine reacts slowly and only partly.

    Thermal stability of the hydrogen halides

    The thermal stability 热稳定性 of the hydrogen halides decreases down the group. The H–X bond gets weaker as the halogen atom gets larger, so HI breaks apart on gentle heating while HCl is very stable.

    Explore

    Halogen and hydrogen halide lab

    Classify halogen chemistry by oxidising and reducing strength.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    oxidising agent 氧化剂 yǎng huà jì
    hydrogen halide 卤化氢 lǔ huà qīng
    thermal stability 热稳定性 rè wěn dìng xìng
    11.3

    Reactions of the halide ions

    Syllabus
    1. describe the relative reactivity of halide ions as reducing agents
    2. describe and explain the reactions of halide ions with: (a) aqueous silver ions followed by aqueous ammonia (the formation and formula of the $[\text{Ag}(\text{NH}_3)_2]^+$ complex is not required) (b) concentrated sulfuric acid, to include balanced chemical equations

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Halide ions as reducing agents

    A halide ion 卤离子 (such as $\text{Cl}^-$) can give away an electron, acting as a reducing agent 还原剂. This power increases down the group, because a larger ion holds its outer electron less tightly.

    Two columns down the group: the halogens with a downward arrow for falling oxidising power, the halide ions with an upward arrow for rising reducing power
    Two opposite trends: the oxidising power of the halogens falls down the group, while the reducing power of the halide ions rises

    Reaction with aqueous silver ions

    Add aqueous silver nitrate, then aqueous ammonia, to identify the halide from the colour of the silver halide precipitate 沉淀:

    Halide Precipitate with $\text{Ag}^+$ Solubility in ammonia
    $\text{Cl}^-$ white dissolves in dilute ammonia
    $\text{Br}^-$ cream dissolves only in concentrated ammonia
    $\text{I}^-$ yellow insoluble in ammonia
    Three test tubes with silver halide precipitates: white silver chloride, cream silver bromide and yellow silver iodide
    Silver halide precipitates: AgCl is white, AgBr cream and AgI yellow — and their solubility in ammonia confirms which halide is present
    Three real test tubes in a wooden rack, labelled AgCl, AgBr and AgI, holding a white, a pale cream and a pale yellow precipitate from left to right
    The silver halide test: AgCl is white, AgBr cream and AgI yellow

    Reaction with concentrated sulfuric acid

    All the halides first give the hydrogen halide. The lower halides are then oxidised by the acid, because they are stronger reducing agents:

    $$\text{NaCl} + \text{H}_2\text{SO}_4 \rightarrow \text{NaHSO}_4 + \text{HCl}$$
    • chloride gives only $\text{HCl}$ (no redox).
    • bromide also gives some brown $\text{Br}_2$ and $\text{SO}_2$.
    • iodide gives $\text{I}_2$ and the smelly gases $\text{H}_2\text{S}$ and $\text{SO}_2$, because $\text{I}^-$ is the strongest reducing agent.
    Three rows: chloride gives only HCl, bromide also gives bromine and sulfur dioxide, iodide gives iodine, hydrogen sulfide and sulfur dioxide, with an arrow showing reducing power increases down the group
    With concentrated sulfuric acid, chloride gives only HCl, but bromide and iodide (stronger reducing agents) are also oxidised to the halogen
    Explore

    Halide ion test lab

    Match halide ion evidence to the ion present.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    halide ion 卤离子 lǔ lí zi
    reducing agent 还原剂 huán yuán jì
    ammonia ān
    precipitate 沉淀 chén diàn
    11.4

    Reactions of chlorine

    Syllabus
    1. describe and interpret, in terms of changes in oxidation number, the reaction of chlorine with cold and with hot aqueous sodium hydroxide and recognise these as disproportionation reactions
    2. explain, including by use of an equation, the use of chlorine in water purification to include the production of the active species $\text{HOCl}$ and $\text{ClO}^-$ which kill bacteria

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Containers of liquid pool chlorine
    Chlorine is added to pool water to kill microbes.

    With sodium hydroxide

    With cold, dilute sodium hydroxide, chlorine reacts to form chloride and chlorate(I):

    $$\text{Cl}_2 + 2\text{NaOH} \rightarrow \text{NaCl} + \text{NaClO} + \text{H}_2\text{O}$$

    With hot, concentrated sodium hydroxide, it forms chloride and chlorate(V):

    $$3\text{Cl}_2 + 6\text{NaOH} \rightarrow 5\text{NaCl} + \text{NaClO}_3 + 3\text{H}_2\text{O}$$

    In both, the oxidation number 氧化数 of chlorine goes both up and down (from $0$), so both are disproportionation 歧化 reactions.

    Chlorine in water purification

    A little chlorine is added to water for water purification 水净化. It reacts with water:

    $$\text{Cl}_2 + \text{H}_2\text{O} \rightleftharpoons \text{HOCl} + \text{HCl}$$

    The active species $\text{HOCl}$ and $\text{ClO}^-$ kill bacteria 细菌, making the water safe to drink.

    Worked example. Solid $\text{NaCl}$, $\text{NaBr}$ and $\text{NaI}$ are each warmed with concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$. Predict the products. Reducing power increases down the group, so how far each halide reduces the sulfuric acid differs. $\text{Cl}^{-}$ is too weak to reduce it at all, so you get only steamy $\text{HCl}$ - an acid-base reaction. $\text{Br}^{-}$ reduces it a little: $\text{HBr}$ plus brown $\text{Br}_2$ and $\text{SO}_2$. $\text{I}^{-}$ is the strongest reducing agent: $\text{HI}$ plus $\text{I}_2$, and it drives the sulfur all the way down to $\text{H}_2\text{S}$, with its bad-egg smell. Every halide gives the hydrogen halide first; the extra products appear only where the halide is a strong enough reducing agent to attack the sulfur.

    Explore

    Chlorine reaction route

    Follow chlorine from water treatment to redox reactions.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    oxidation number 氧化数 yǎng huà shù
    disproportionation 歧化 qí huà
    water purification 水净化 shuǐ jìng huà
    bacteria 细菌 xì jūn
    11.4

    Exam tips

    • Halogens get less reactive down the group (harder to gain an electron); oxidising power decreases.
    • Displacement: a more reactive halogen displaces a less reactive halide — state the colour change.
    • Test halide ions with $\text{AgNO}_3$: white ($\text{Cl}^-$), cream ($\text{Br}^-$), yellow ($\text{I}^-$), then confirm with dilute/concentrated ammonia.
    • Chlorine with water and with cold $\text{NaOH}$ are disproportionation — show the oxidation-number changes.
  • 12 Nitrogen and sulfur
    12.1

    Why nitrogen is unreactive

    Syllabus
    1. explain the lack of reactivity of nitrogen, with reference to triple bond strength and lack of polarity
    2. describe and explain: (a) the basicity of ammonia, using the Brønsted–Lowry theory (b) the structure of the ammonium ion and its formation by an acid–base reaction (c) the displacement of ammonia from ammonium salts by an acid–base reaction
    3. state and explain the natural and man-made occurrences of oxides of nitrogen and their catalytic removal from the exhaust gases of internal combustion engines
    4. understand that atmospheric oxides of nitrogen ($\text{NO}$ and $\text{NO}_2$) can react with unburned hydrocarbons to form peroxyacetyl nitrate, PAN, which is a component of photochemical smog
    5. describe the role of $\text{NO}$ and $\text{NO}_2$ in the formation of acid rain both directly and in their catalytic role in the oxidation of atmospheric sulfur dioxide

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Nitrogen gas, $\text{N}_2$, makes up most of the air but reacts with very little. There are two reasons:

    • the two nitrogen atoms are joined by a triple bond 三键, which has a very high bond energy 键能. A lot of energy is needed to break it.
    • the molecule has no polarity 极性 — it is perfectly symmetrical, so nothing pulls other molecules towards it.
    Two nitrogen atoms joined by a triple bond, each with a lone pair, labelled as a strong bond and a symmetrical, non-polar molecule
    Nitrogen is unreactive for two reasons: a very strong triple bond, and a symmetrical, non-polar molecule
    Explore

    The shape of ammonia

    Ammonia has three bonding pairs and one lone pair — the lone pair pushes the bonds down into a pyramidal shape (about 107°).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    triple bond 三键 sān jiàn
    bond energy 键能 jiàn néng
    polarity 极性 jí xìng
    12.1

    Ammonia and the ammonium ion

    A large industrial chemical complex
    Ammonia is converted into nitrogen fertilisers in industrial plants on a huge scale.

    Basicity of ammonia

    The basicity 碱性 of ammonia (its ability to act as a base) comes from the lone pair 孤对电子 of electrons on the nitrogen atom. Using the Brønsted–Lowry theory, ammonia is a base because this lone pair can accept a proton 质子 ($\text{H}^+$):

    $$\text{NH}_3 + \text{H}^+ \rightarrow \text{NH}_4^+$$
    Ammonia with a lone pair on its nitrogen accepts a hydrogen ion to form the tetrahedral ammonium ion
    Ammonia acts as a base because the lone pair on its nitrogen accepts a proton, making the ammonium ion

    The ammonium ion

    When the lone pair forms a bond to $\text{H}^+$, it makes the ammonium ion 铵离子, $\text{NH}_4^+$. Because both shared electrons came from the nitrogen, this new bond is a coordinate bond 配位键. The ion has four identical N–H bonds and a tetrahedral shape.

    Displacement of ammonia from its salts

    If you warm an ammonium salt with a base (such as sodium hydroxide), you push out ammonia gas. This is an acid–base displacement 置换:

    $$\text{NH}_4\text{Cl} + \text{NaOH} \rightarrow \text{NaCl} + \text{NH}_3 + \text{H}_2\text{O}$$

    The sharp smell of ammonia, and damp red litmus turning blue, is a test for an ammonium salt.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    basicity 碱性 jiǎn xìng
    lone pair 孤对电子 gū duì diàn zi
    proton 质子 zhì zi
    ammonium ion 铵离子 ǎn lí zi
    coordinate bond 配位键 pèi wèi jiàn
    displacement 置换 zhì huàn
    12.1

    Oxides of nitrogen and air pollution

    Where they come from

    Oxides of nitrogen ($\text{NO}$ and $\text{NO}_2$, together called $\text{NO}_x$) come from two sources:

    • natural: lightning gives enough energy for nitrogen and oxygen in the air to combine.
    • man-made: the high temperature inside an internal combustion engine 内燃机 makes nitrogen and oxygen react:
    $$\text{N}_2 + \text{O}_2 \rightarrow 2\text{NO}$$

    Removing them from car exhaust

    A catalytic converter 催化转化器 cleans the exhaust gases 尾气. It lets the harmful gases react together to form harmless ones:

    $$2\text{NO} + 2\text{CO} \rightarrow \text{N}_2 + 2\text{CO}_2$$
    Harmful NO and CO gases passing through a catalyst block and leaving as harmless nitrogen and carbon dioxide
    In a catalytic converter the harmful gases NO and CO react over the catalyst to form harmless N$_2$ and CO$_2$

    Photochemical smog

    In sunlight, $\text{NO}$ and $\text{NO}_2$ react with unburned hydrocarbons to form peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN). PAN is a harmful part of photochemical smog 光化学烟雾, the brown haze seen over busy cities.

    An aerial view of a large city with a distinct brown-grey layer of haze sitting over the buildings under a clear blue sky above
    Photochemical smog over a big city. The brown layer is trapped low down, exactly where the traffic fumes are — sunlight turns those nitrogen oxides and unburned hydrocarbons into the haze you can see

    Acid rain

    The oxides of nitrogen also help make acid rain 酸雨 in two ways:

    • directly: $\text{NO}_2$ dissolves in rain to form nitric acid.
    • as a catalyst: $\text{NO}_2$ speeds up the oxidation of atmospheric sulfur dioxide 二氧化硫 ($\text{SO}_2$) into $\text{SO}_3$, which then forms sulfuric acid in the rain.
    A flow diagram: NO2 forms nitric acid and SO2 forms sulfuric acid, with NO2 also catalysing the sulfur path, both leading to acid rain
    Nitrogen and sulfur oxides make acid rain: NO$_2$ forms nitric acid directly and also catalyses the oxidation of SO$_2$ to sulfuric acid

    Worked example. A white solid is warmed with aqueous $\text{NaOH}$, and a gas is released that turns damp red litmus blue. Identify the gas and the ion in the solid, and explain the reaction. The only common gas that turns damp red litmus blue is ammonia, $\text{NH}_3$, so the solid contains the ammonium ion, $\text{NH}_4^{+}$. The hydroxide ion is the stronger base, so it takes the proton back from the ammonium ion:

    $$\text{NH}_4^{+} + \text{OH}^{-} \rightarrow \text{NH}_3 + \text{H}_2\text{O}$$

    This is the standard test for $\text{NH}_4^{+}$. Always say the litmus is damp: the ammonia must dissolve in the water before it can show its basicity, so dry litmus would give no colour change at all.

    Explore

    NOx pollution route

    Trace nitrogen oxides from hot engines to environmental harm.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    internal combustion engine 内燃机 nèi rán jī
    catalytic converter 催化转化器 cuī huà zhuǎn huà qì
    exhaust gases 尾气 wěi qì
    photochemical smog 光化学烟雾 guāng huà xué yān wù
    acid rain 酸雨 suān yǔ
    sulfur dioxide 二氧化硫 èr yǎng huà liú
    12.1

    Exam tips

    • $\text{N}_2$ is unreactive because of its strong triple bond (very high bond energy) — state this exactly.
    • Ammonia is a base and a ligand because of its lone pair; the ammonium ion forms by a dative bond.
    • Explain how oxides of nitrogen form (high temperature in engines) and their link to acid rain and photochemical smog.
    • Give balanced equations and correct observations for reactions of ammonia and the ammonium ion.
  • 13 An introduction to AS Level organic chemistry
    13.1

    Formulas, functional groups and naming

    Syllabus
    1. define the term hydrocarbon as a compound made up of C and H atoms only
    2. understand that alkanes are simple hydrocarbons with no functional group
    3. understand that the compounds in the table on pages 29 and 30 contain a functional group which dictates their physical and chemical properties
    4. interpret and use the general, structural, displayed and skeletal formulas of the classes of compound stated in the table on pages 29 and 30
    5. understand and use systematic nomenclature of simple aliphatic organic molecules with functional groups detailed in the table on pages 29 and 30, up to six carbon atoms (six plus six for esters, straight chains only for esters and nitriles)
    6. deduce the molecular and/or empirical formula of a compound, given its structural, displayed or skeletal formula

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A sample of dark crude oil
    Crude oil is a complex mixture of hydrocarbons — the feedstock for organic chemistry.

    A hydrocarbon 碳氢化合物 is a compound of only carbon and hydrogen. Alkanes 烷烃 are the simplest hydrocarbons and have no functional group.

    A functional group 官能团 is the reactive part of a molecule. It decides the physical and chemical properties of the compound, so molecules with the same functional group behave alike (for example the $\text{–OH}$ group in alcohols).

    Types of formula

    Formula What it shows
    general formula 通式 the pattern for a whole family, e.g. alkanes are $\text{C}_n\text{H}_{2n+2}$
    molecular formula 分子式 the actual number of each atom, e.g. $\text{C}_4\text{H}_{10}$
    structural formula 结构式 the groups in order, e.g. $\text{CH}_3\text{CH}_2\text{CH}_2\text{CH}_3$
    displayed formula 展开式 every atom and every bond drawn out
    skeletal formula 骨架式 lines for bonds; carbons at corners, hydrogens on carbon not shown
    Butane drawn four ways: the molecular formula, the structural formula, the displayed formula with every atom and bond, and the skeletal zigzag
    The same molecule (butane) shown four ways — molecular, structural, displayed and skeletal — each hiding more detail than the last

    You can read off the empirical formula 实验式 (simplest ratio) from any of these.

    Naming

    Use systematic nomenclature 命名法: a stem for the number of carbons (meth-, eth-, prop-, but-, pent-, hex- for 1 to 6), an ending for the functional group, and numbers to show where groups are.

    Explore

    Functional group lab

    Sort organic molecules by the group that controls their reactions.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    hydrocarbon 碳氢化合物 tàn qīng huà hé wù
    alkane 烷烃 wán tīng
    functional group 官能团 guān néng tuán
    general formula 通式 tōng shì
    molecular formula 分子式 fēn zǐ shì
    structural formula 结构式 jié gòu shì
    displayed formula 展开式 zhǎn kāi shì
    skeletal formula 骨架式 gǔ jià shì
    empirical formula 实验式 shí yàn shì
    nomenclature 命名法 mìng míng fǎ
    13.2

    Characteristic organic reactions

    Syllabus
    1. interpret and use the following terminology associated with types of organic compounds and reactions: (a) homologous series (b) saturated and unsaturated (c) homolytic and heterolytic fission (d) free radical, initiation, propagation, termination (e) nucleophile, electrophile, nucleophilic, electrophilic (f) addition, substitution, elimination, hydrolysis, condensation (g) oxidation and reduction (in equations for organic redox reactions, the symbol [O] can be used to represent one atom of oxygen from an oxidising agent and the symbol [H] to represent one atom of hydrogen from a reducing agent)
    2. understand and use the following terminology associated with types of organic mechanisms: (a) free-radical substitution (b) electrophilic addition (c) nucleophilic substitution (d) nucleophilic addition (in organic reaction mechanisms, the use of curly arrows to represent movement of electron pairs is expected; the arrow should begin at a bond or a lone pair of electrons)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Some key terms

    • a homologous series 同系列 is a family of compounds with the same functional group and general formula, where each member differs by $\text{CH}_2$.
    • a saturated 饱和 compound has only single C–C bonds; an unsaturated 不饱和 compound has a C=C double bond (or a triple bond).

    Breaking bonds

    A covalent bond can break in two ways:

    • homolytic fission 均裂: the bond splits evenly, one electron to each atom. This makes two free radicals 自由基 (species with an unpaired electron).
    • heterolytic fission 异裂: the bond splits unevenly, both electrons going to one atom. This makes two ions.
    Homolytic fission splitting a Cl–Cl bond into two chlorine radicals; heterolytic fission sending both bonding electrons to bromine to give two ions
    Homolytic fission gives one electron to each atom (two radicals); heterolytic fission gives both electrons to one atom (two ions)

    Attacking species

    • a nucleophile 亲核试剂 is a species with a lone pair that is attracted to a positive (electron-poor) centre.
    • an electrophile 亲电试剂 is a species attracted to a negative (electron-rich) centre, such as a C=C double bond.
    A nucleophile using its lone pair to attack a slightly positive carbon; an electrophile being drawn to a C=C double bond
    A nucleophile uses its lone pair to attack an electron-poor centre; an electrophile is drawn to an electron-rich one such as a C=C bond

    Types of reaction

    Reaction What happens
    addition 加成 two molecules join to make one
    substitution 取代 one atom or group is swapped for another
    elimination 消去 a small molecule is removed, making a double bond
    hydrolysis 水解 a molecule is split apart by water
    condensation 缩合 two molecules join and a small molecule (such as water) is lost

    For organic redox, the symbol $[\text{O}]$ stands for one oxygen atom from an oxidising agent, and $[\text{H}]$ for one hydrogen atom from a reducing agent.

    Types of mechanism

    A free-radical reaction happens in three steps: initiation 引发 (radicals are made), propagation 增长 (radicals react and make new radicals), and termination 终止 (two radicals join and stop the chain).

    The main mechanisms you meet are free-radical substitution 自由基取代 (alkanes), electrophilic addition 亲电加成 (alkenes), nucleophilic substitution 亲核取代 (halogenoalkanes) and nucleophilic addition 亲核加成 (carbonyls). In mechanisms, a curly arrow 弯箭头 shows a pair of electrons moving; it starts at a bond or a lone pair 孤对电子.

    Explore

    Bond fission and attack route

    Watch a polar bond lead to electrophiles, nucleophiles and radicals.

    Explore

    Organic reaction type lab

    Classify reaction examples by the pattern of bonds changing.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    homologous series 同系列 tóng xì liè
    saturated 饱和 bǎo hé
    unsaturated 不饱和 bù bǎo hé
    homolytic fission 均裂 jūn liè
    free radical 自由基 zì yóu jī
    heterolytic fission 异裂 yì liè
    nucleophile 亲核试剂 qīn hé shì jì
    electrophile 亲电试剂 qīn diàn shì jì
    addition 加成 jiā chéng
    substitution 取代 qǔ dài
    elimination 消去 xiāo qù
    hydrolysis 水解 shuǐ jiě
    condensation 缩合 suō hé
    initiation 引发 yǐn fā
    propagation 增长 zēng zhǎng
    termination 终止 zhōng zhǐ
    free-radical substitution 自由基取代 zì yóu jī qǔ dài
    electrophilic addition 亲电加成 qīn diàn jiā chéng
    nucleophilic substitution 亲核取代 qīn hé qǔ dài
    nucleophilic addition 亲核加成 qīn hé jiā chéng
    curly arrow 弯箭头 wān jiàn tóu
    lone pair 孤对电子 gū duì diàn zi
    13.3

    Shapes of organic molecules

    Syllabus
    1. describe organic molecules as either straight-chained, branched or cyclic
    2. describe and explain the shape of, and bond angles in, molecules containing $\text{sp}$, $\text{sp}^2$ and $\text{sp}^3$ hybridised atoms
    3. describe the arrangement of $\sigma$ and $\pi$ bonds in molecules containing $\text{sp}$, $\text{sp}^2$ and $\text{sp}^3$ hybridised atoms
    4. understand and use the term planar when describing the arrangement of atoms in organic molecules, for example ethene

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A ball-and-stick molecular model
    Organic molecules have definite three-dimensional shapes.

    Organic molecules can be straight-chained, branched or cyclic 环状 (in a ring).

    The shape around a carbon depends on its hybridisation 杂化:

    Hybridisation Bonds Shape Angle
    $\text{sp}^3$ 4 single tetrahedral $109.5°$
    $\text{sp}^2$ 1 double + 2 single planar 平面 (flat) $120°$
    $\text{sp}$ 1 triple (or 2 doubles) linear $180°$

    Every single bond is a sigma bond σ, made by direct overlap. A double bond is one sigma bond plus one pi bond π, made by sideways overlap of p orbitals. Ethene is planar because of its $\text{sp}^2$ carbons.

    Three carbons: an sp3 carbon in tetrahedral methane, an sp2 carbon in planar ethene, and an sp carbon in linear ethyne, each with its bond angle
    The shape at a carbon follows from its hybridisation: sp$^3$ is tetrahedral ($109.5°$), sp$^2$ is planar ($120°$), sp is linear ($180°$)
    Explore

    Shapes of organic molecules

    VSEPR around each carbon

    Around a single-bonded carbon the four pairs are tetrahedral (109.5°).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    cyclic 环状 huán zhuàng
    hybridisation 杂化 zá huà
    planar 平面 píng miàn
    sigma bond σ键 σ jiàn
    pi bond π键 π jiàn
    13.4

    Isomerism

    Syllabus
    1. describe structural isomerism and its division into chain, positional and functional group isomerism
    2. describe stereoisomerism and its division into geometrical (cis/trans) and optical isomerism (use of E/Z nomenclature is acceptable but is not required)
    3. describe geometrical (cis/trans) isomerism in alkenes, and explain its origin in terms of restricted rotation due to the presence of $\pi$ bonds
    4. explain what is meant by a chiral centre and that such a centre gives rise to two optical isomers (enantiomers) (Candidates should appreciate that compounds can contain more than one chiral centre, but knowledge of meso compounds, or nomenclature such as diastereoisomers is not required.)
    5. identify chiral centres and geometrical (cis/trans) isomerism in a molecule of given structural formula including cyclic compounds
    6. deduce the possible isomers for an organic molecule of known molecular formula

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Isomers are compounds with the same molecular formula but a different arrangement of atoms. This is called isomerism 异构.

    Structural isomerism

    In structural isomerism 结构异构 the atoms are joined in a different order. There are three kinds:

    • chain isomerism 链异构: the carbon chain is branched in different ways.
    • positional isomerism 位置异构: the functional group is on a different carbon.
    • functional group isomerism 官能团异构: the atoms form a different functional group (for example an alcohol and an ether).
    Three pairs of skeletal structures: butane vs 2-methylpropane, propan-1-ol vs propan-2-ol, and ethanol vs methoxymethane
    The three kinds of structural isomerism — chain, positional and functional-group — each pair sharing the same molecular formula

    Stereoisomerism

    In stereoisomerism 立体异构 the atoms are joined in the same order but point in different directions in space.

    • geometrical isomerism 几何异构 (cis/trans) happens at a C=C double bond. The pi bond stops the two carbons rotating (restricted rotation 受限旋转), so groups are fixed on the same side (cis 顺式) or opposite sides (trans 反式).
    But-2-ene drawn twice: cis with both methyl groups on the same side of the double bond, trans with them on opposite sides
    Cis–trans isomerism at a C=C bond: the methyl groups are fixed on the same side (cis) or opposite sides (trans) because the bond cannot rotate
    • optical isomerism 旋光异构 happens at a chiral 手性 carbon — a chiral centre 手性中心 is a carbon with four different groups attached. Such a carbon gives two mirror-image forms called enantiomers 对映体. A molecule may have more than one chiral centre.
    A carbon bonded to four different atoms (F, H, Cl, Br) drawn next to its mirror image, the two not superimposable
    Optical isomerism: a carbon with four different groups gives two mirror-image forms (enantiomers) that cannot be superimposed

    From a molecular formula you can deduce the possible isomers by trying different chains, positions and functional groups.

    Worked example. Explain why but-2-ene shows cis-trans (E/Z) isomerism but but-1-ene does not. Stereoisomerism at a C=C needs two things: restricted rotation about the double bond (both alkenes have that), and two different groups on each of the two double-bond carbons. In but-2-ene, $\text{CH}_3\text{CH=CHCH}_3$, each double-bond carbon carries an $\text{H}$ and a $\text{CH}_3$ - different, so the methyl groups can sit on the same side (cis / Z) or on opposite sides (trans / E). In but-1-ene, $\text{CH}_2\text{=CHCH}_2\text{CH}_3$, the first carbon carries two hydrogens - identical, so swapping them changes nothing and only one form exists. Test each double-bond carbon separately: two identical groups on either carbon kills the isomerism, however different the other carbon may be.

    Explore

    Structural isomerism lab

    Compare molecules with the same formula but different structures.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    isomerism 异构 yì gòu
    structural isomerism 结构异构 jié gòu yì gòu
    chain isomerism 链异构 liàn yì gòu
    positional isomerism 位置异构 wèi zhì yì gòu
    functional group isomerism 官能团异构 guān néng tuán yì gòu
    stereoisomerism 立体异构 lì tǐ yì gòu
    geometrical isomerism 几何异构 jǐ hé yì gòu
    restricted rotation 受限旋转 shòu xiàn xuán zhuǎn
    cis 顺式 shùn shì
    trans 反式 fǎn shì
    optical isomerism 旋光异构 xuán guāng yì gòu
    chiral 手性 shǒu xìng
    chiral centre 手性中心 shǒu xìng zhōng xīn
    enantiomers 对映体 duì yìng tǐ
    13.4

    Exam tips

    • Know the difference between general, molecular, structural, displayed and skeletal formulas — questions ask for a specific one.
    • Name systematically: longest chain, lowest locants, substituents alphabetical; a wrong locant loses the mark.
    • Classify each reaction by type and reagent (addition, substitution, elimination, oxidation).
    • E/Z isomerism needs restricted rotation about a $\text{C}=\text{C}$ and two different groups on each carbon.
  • 14 Hydrocarbons
    14.1

    Alkanes

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions (reagents and conditions) by which alkanes can be produced: (a) addition of hydrogen to an alkene in a hydrogenation reaction, $\text{H}_2\text{(g)}$ and $\text{Pt/Ni}$ catalyst and heat (b) cracking of a longer chain alkane, heat with $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$
    2. describe: (a) the complete and incomplete combustion of alkanes (b) the free-radical substitution of alkanes by $\text{Cl}_2$ or $\text{Br}_2$ in the presence of ultraviolet light, as exemplified by the reactions of ethane
    3. describe the mechanism of free-radical substitution with reference to the initiation, propagation and termination steps
    4. suggest how cracking can be used to obtain more useful alkanes and alkenes of lower $M_r$ from heavier crude oil fractions
    5. understand the general unreactivity of alkanes, including towards polar reagents in terms of the strength of the $\text{C–H}$ bonds and their relative lack of polarity
    6. recognise the environmental consequences of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen and unburnt hydrocarbons arising from the combustion of alkanes in the internal combustion engine and of their catalytic removal

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Blue flames on a gas stove
    Natural gas — mainly methane, the simplest alkane — burns on a stove.

    Alkanes 烷烃 are saturated hydrocarbons (general formula $\text{C}_n\text{H}_{2n+2}$).

    Making alkanes

    • hydrogenation 氢化: add hydrogen to an alkene 烯烃, using a $\text{Pt}$ or $\text{Ni}$ catalyst and heat.
    • cracking 裂化: break a long-chain alkane into shorter ones by heating with $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$.

    Combustion

    In combustion 燃烧 an alkane burns in oxygen:

    Complete combustion gives CO2 and water; incomplete combustion also gives CO and soot
    Complete combustion gives CO2 and water; incomplete also gives CO and soot
    • complete combustion 完全燃烧 (plenty of oxygen) gives carbon dioxide and water.
    • incomplete combustion 不完全燃烧 (not enough oxygen) gives water plus toxic carbon monoxide 一氧化碳 ($\text{CO}$) and soot (carbon).

    You are often asked to write the balanced equation. Balance it in a fixed order - carbon first, then hydrogen, and oxygen last - because oxygen is the only element left on just one side:

    $$\text{C}_6\text{H}_{14} + 9\tfrac{1}{2}\,\text{O}_2 \rightarrow 6\,\text{CO}_2 + 7\,\text{H}_2\text{O}$$

    The 6 carbons fix $6\,\text{CO}_2$; the 14 hydrogens fix $7\,\text{H}_2\text{O}$; counting the oxygens on the right gives $12 + 7 = 19$, so the left needs $19 \div 2 = 9\tfrac{1}{2}$. A half of $\text{O}_2$ is perfectly acceptable in this equation - and if the question asks for whole numbers, simply double everything ($2\,\text{C}_6\text{H}_{14} + 19\,\text{O}_2 \rightarrow 12\,\text{CO}_2 + 14\,\text{H}_2\text{O}$).

    Free-radical substitution

    Alkanes react with chlorine or bromine by free-radical substitution 自由基取代, in ultraviolet light 紫外线. For ethane and chlorine the mechanism has three steps:

    • initiation 引发 — UV light splits the halogen into two free radicals 自由基: $\;\text{Cl}_2 \rightarrow 2\,\text{Cl}\cdot$ This kind of break is homolytic fission 均裂: the bond splits evenly, one electron going to each atom, which is what makes two radicals. (The opposite, heterolytic fission 异裂, sends both electrons to one atom and makes a pair of ions - that is what happens in the polar mechanisms such as electrophilic addition.) Examiners ask for this word by name, so use it.
    • propagation 增长 — radicals react and make new radicals:
      $$\text{Cl}\cdot + \text{C}_2\text{H}_6 \rightarrow \text{C}_2\text{H}_5\cdot + \text{HCl} \qquad \text{C}_2\text{H}_5\cdot + \text{Cl}_2 \rightarrow \text{C}_2\text{H}_5\text{Cl} + \text{Cl}\cdot$$
    • termination 终止 — two radicals join, ending the chain: $\;\text{Cl}\cdot + \text{C}_2\text{H}_5\cdot \rightarrow \text{C}_2\text{H}_5\text{Cl}$
    The three steps of free-radical substitution: initiation splitting chlorine into radicals, propagation carrying the chain, and termination joining two radicals
    Free-radical substitution in three steps: initiation makes radicals, propagation carries the chain, and termination ends it

    Why cracking is useful, and why alkanes are unreactive

    Cracking turns heavy fractions of crude oil 原油 into more useful, lower-$M_r$ alkanes and alkenes. (A fraction 馏分 is a group of molecules with a similar boiling-point range.)

    Alkanes are generally unreactive, especially towards polar reagents. This is because the C–H and C–C bonds are strong and have little polarity 极性, so there is no charge to attract an attacking species.

    Environmental effects

    Burning alkanes in an internal combustion engine gives off carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen and unburnt hydrocarbons. A catalytic converter removes these by turning them into harmless gases.

    Explore

    The tetrahedral carbon

    Each carbon in an alkane has four bonding pairs and no lone pairs — they spread as far apart as possible into a tetrahedron (109.5°).

    Explore

    Free-radical substitution

    Methane reacts with chlorine in UV light by a chain of radical steps.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    alkane 烷烃 wán tīng
    hydrogenation 氢化 qīng huà
    alkene 烯烃 xī tīng
    cracking 裂化 liè huà
    combustion 燃烧 rán shāo
    complete combustion 完全燃烧 wán quán rán shāo
    incomplete combustion 不完全燃烧 bù wán quán rán shāo
    carbon monoxide 一氧化碳 yī yǎng huà tàn
    free-radical substitution 自由基取代 zì yóu jī qǔ dài
    ultraviolet light 紫外线 zǐ wài xiàn
    initiation 引发 yǐn fā
    free radical 自由基 zì yóu jī
    propagation 增长 zēng zhǎng
    termination 终止 zhōng zhǐ
    crude oil 原油 yuán yóu
    fraction 馏分 liú fèn
    polarity 极性 jí xìng
    homolytic fission 均裂 jūn liè
    heterolytic fission 异裂 yì liè
    14.2

    Alkenes

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions (including reagents and conditions) by which alkenes can be produced: (a) elimination of $\text{HX}$ from a halogenoalkane by ethanolic $\text{NaOH}$ and heat (b) dehydration of an alcohol, by using a heated catalyst (e.g. $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$) or a concentrated acid (e.g. concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$) (c) cracking of a longer chain alkane
    2. describe the following reactions of alkenes: (a) the electrophilic addition of (i) hydrogen in a hydrogenation reaction, $\text{H}_2\text{(g)}$ and $\text{Pt/Ni}$ catalyst and heat (ii) steam, $\text{H}_2\text{O(g)}$ and $\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$ catalyst (iii) a hydrogen halide, $\text{HX(g)}$, at room temperature (iv) a halogen, $\text{X}_2$ (b) the oxidation by cold dilute acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ to form the diol (c) the oxidation by hot concentrated acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ leading to the rupture of the carbon–carbon double bond and the identities of the subsequent products to determine the position of alkene linkages in larger molecules (d) addition polymerisation exemplified by the reactions of ethene and propene
    3. describe the use of aqueous bromine to show the presence of a C=C bond
    4. describe the mechanism of electrophilic addition in alkenes, using bromine/ethene and hydrogen bromide/propene as examples
    5. describe and explain the inductive effects of alkyl groups on the stability of primary, secondary and tertiary cations formed during electrophilic addition (this should be used to explain Markovnikov addition)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An oil refinery
    Cracking heavy fractions at a refinery produces alkenes for plastics and fuels.

    Alkenes have a C=C double bond (general formula $\text{C}_n\text{H}_{2n}$). The double bond is the functional group, so alkenes are reactive.

    Making alkenes

    • elimination 消去 of $\text{HX}$ from a halogenoalkane 卤代烷, using $\text{NaOH}$ dissolved in ethanol, with heat.
    • dehydration 脱水 of an alcohol, using a hot $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$ catalyst or concentrated sulfuric acid.
    • cracking of a longer-chain alkane.

    Reactions of alkenes

    Most reactions are electrophilic addition 亲电加成 across the double bond:

    Reagent and conditions Product
    $\text{H}_2$, $\text{Pt/Ni}$ catalyst, heat alkane
    steam 水蒸气 ($\text{H}_2\text{O}$), $\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$ catalyst alcohol
    a hydrogen halide 卤化氢 ($\text{HX}$), room temperature halogenoalkane
    a halogen $\text{X}_2$ a di-substituted alkane

    There are also two oxidation reactions with acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$:

    • cold, dilute $\text{KMnO}_4$ adds two $\text{–OH}$ groups to give a diol 二醇.
    • hot, concentrated $\text{KMnO}_4$ breaks the C=C bond right apart, and what each half turns into tells you exactly where the double bond used to be.

    That second reaction is worth learning properly, because it is how the exam asks you to locate a double bond in a large molecule. Oxidation is written with $[\text{O}]$, meaning "an oxygen atom from the oxidising agent". Cut the molecule at the C=C, then look at what each of the two carbons was carrying:

    The C=C carbon carries It becomes
    two alkyl groups ($\text{=CR}_2$) a ketone, $\text{R}_2\text{C=O}$
    one alkyl and one $\text{H}$ ($\text{=CHR}$) a carboxylic acid 羧酸, $\text{RCOOH}$
    two hydrogens ($\text{=CH}_2$) $\text{CO}_2$ and water

    The pattern is simply how many hydrogens that carbon had: none stops at a ketone, one is pushed on to an acid, and two are oxidised all the way to $\text{CO}_2$.

    Worked example. Give the products when $(\text{CH}_3)_2\text{C=CHCH}_3$ is heated with hot concentrated acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$. Cut at the C=C and take each carbon separately. The left carbon carries two methyl groups and no hydrogen, so it stops at a ketone: $(\text{CH}_3)_2\text{C=O}$, which is propanone. The right carbon carries one methyl and one H, so it goes on to a carboxylic acid: $\text{CH}_3\text{COOH}$, ethanoic acid. So:

    $$(\text{CH}_3)_2\text{C=CHCH}_3 + 3[\text{O}] \rightarrow \text{CH}_3\text{COCH}_3 + \text{CH}_3\text{COOH}$$

    Now run it backwards, which is the way the question is usually set. Given the products, rebuild the alkene by putting the two carbonyl carbons back together as a C=C: a ketone means that carbon had two alkyl groups, an acid means one alkyl and one H, and $\text{CO}_2$ means the chain ended in $\text{=CH}_2$. Getting $\text{CO}_2$ is the strongest clue of all - it can only come from a terminal double bond.

    Test for a C=C bond

    Shake the compound with orange bromine water 溴水. An alkene decolourises it (turns it colourless) by electrophilic addition. An alkane does not.

    Two test tubes of orange bromine water: the one with an alkene has turned colourless, the one with an alkane is still orange
    The bromine-water test: an alkene decolourises the orange bromine water, while an alkane leaves it orange

    Addition polymerisation

    In addition polymerisation 加成聚合, many alkene molecules join into one long chain, with no other product. Ethene gives poly(ethene). The long-chain product is a polymer 聚合物.

    n ethene molecules with double bonds on the left becoming the repeating unit of poly(ethene) in brackets on the right
    Addition polymerisation: many ethene molecules open their double bonds and join into the long chain of poly(ethene)

    The mechanism and Markovnikov's rule

    In electrophilic addition (for example bromine with ethene), the electron-rich C=C attracts the electrophile. This forms a positive intermediate called a carbocation 碳正离子, which the negative part then attacks.

    The mechanism of bromine adding to ethene: curly arrows show the C=C attacking one bromine, a carbocation forming, then bromide attacking it to give 1,2-dibromoethane
    Electrophilic addition of bromine to ethene: the C=C attacks Br$^{\delta+}$, a carbocation forms, then Br$^-$ attacks it

    Alkyl groups push electrons towards the positive carbon — this is the inductive effect 诱导效应. So a carbocation with more alkyl groups is more stable: tertiary is more stable than secondary, which is more stable than primary. When $\text{HBr}$ adds to propene, the more stable carbocation forms, so hydrogen adds to the carbon that already has more hydrogens. This pattern is Markovnikov's rule 马氏规则.

    Primary, secondary and tertiary carbocations with arrows showing alkyl groups pushing electrons towards the positive carbon, stability rising left to right
    Carbocation stability rises from primary to tertiary as more alkyl groups push electrons in — the basis of Markovnikov's rule

    Worked example. Predict the major product when $\text{HBr}$ adds to propene, $\text{CH}_3\text{CH=CH}_2$. The $\text{H}^{+}$ adds first, and it adds in whichever way makes the more stable carbocation. Adding the $\text{H}$ to the end carbon puts the positive charge on the middle carbon, giving a secondary carbocation, which is stabilised by electron-releasing alkyl groups on two sides. Adding it to the middle carbon would leave a less stable primary carbocation. The bromide ion then attacks the secondary carbocation, so the major product is 2-bromopropane. That is Markovnikov's rule - but quote the reason (carbocation stability: tertiary > secondary > primary), because the rule on its own is not the explanation.

    Explore

    Alkene addition route

    Follow how the C=C bond opens and new atoms add.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    elimination 消去 xiāo qù
    halogenoalkane 卤代烷 lǔ dài wán
    dehydration 脱水 tuō shuǐ
    alcohol chún
    electrophilic addition 亲电加成 qīn diàn jiā chéng
    steam 水蒸气 shuǐ zhēng qì
    hydrogen halide 卤化氢 lǔ huà qīng
    diol 二醇 èr chún
    bromine water 溴水 xiù shuǐ
    addition polymerisation 加成聚合 jiā chéng jù hé
    polymer 聚合物 jù hé wù
    carbocation 碳正离子 tàn zhèng lí zi
    inductive effect 诱导效应 yòu dǎo xiào yìng
    Markovnikov's rule 马氏规则 mǎ shì guī zé
    ketone tóng
    carboxylic acid 羧酸 suō suān
    14.2

    Exam tips

    • Alkanes: free-radical substitution needs UV light — show initiation, propagation and termination with the radical dots.
    • Alkenes: electrophilic addition via a carbocation; draw curly arrows from the $\text{C}=\text{C}$.
    • Markovnikov: H adds to the carbon with more H's, via the more stable carbocation (alkyl groups are electron-releasing).
    • Test for $\text{C}=\text{C}$: bromine water decolourises (orange → colourless) — state the observation.
  • 15 Halogen compounds
    15.1

    Halogenoalkanes

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions (reagents and conditions) by which halogenoalkanes can be produced: (a) the free-radical substitution of alkanes by $\text{Cl}_2$ or $\text{Br}_2$ in the presence of ultraviolet light, as exemplified by the reactions of ethane (b) electrophilic addition of an alkene with a halogen, $\text{X}_2$, or hydrogen halide, $\text{HX(g)}$, at room temperature (c) substitution of an alcohol, e.g. by reaction with $\text{HX(g)}$; or with $\text{KCl}$ and concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ or concentrated $\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$; or with $\text{PCl}_3$ and heat; or with $\text{PCl}_5$; or with $\text{SOCl}_2$
    2. classify halogenoalkanes into primary, secondary and tertiary
    3. describe the following nucleophilic substitution reactions: (a) the reaction with $\text{NaOH(aq)}$ and heat to produce an alcohol (b) the reaction with $\text{KCN}$ in ethanol and heat to produce a nitrile (c) the reaction with $\text{NH}_3$ in ethanol heated under pressure to produce an amine (d) the reaction with aqueous silver nitrate in ethanol as a method of identifying the halogen present as exemplified by bromoethane
    4. describe the elimination reaction with $\text{NaOH}$ in ethanol and heat to produce an alkene as exemplified by bromoethane
    5. describe the $\text{S}_\text{N}1$ and $\text{S}_\text{N}2$ mechanisms of nucleophilic substitution in halogenoalkanes including the inductive effects of alkyl groups
    6. recall that primary halogenoalkanes tend to react via the $\text{S}_\text{N}2$ mechanism; tertiary halogenoalkanes via the $\text{S}_\text{N}1$ mechanism; and secondary halogenoalkanes by a mixture of the two, depending on structure
    7. describe and explain the different reactivities of halogenoalkanes (with particular reference to the relative strengths of the C–X bonds as exemplified by the reactions of halogenoalkanes with aqueous silver nitrates)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A halogenoalkane 卤代烷 is an alkane with one or more halogen atoms in place of hydrogen (a C–X bond, where X is a halogen).

    A can of freezer spray releasing a cold halogenoalkane vapour
    Volatile halogenoalkanes were once widely used as refrigerants and aerosol propellants

    Making halogenoalkanes

    • free-radical substitution 自由基取代 of an alkane with $\text{Cl}_2$ or $\text{Br}_2$ in ultraviolet light.
    • electrophilic addition 亲电加成 of an alkene with a halogen $\text{X}_2$ or a hydrogen halide $\text{HX}$.
    • substitution of an alcohol, for example by $\text{HX}$, by $\text{PCl}_5$, by $\text{PCl}_3$ with heat, or by $\text{SOCl}_2$.

    Three classes

    A halogenoalkane is primary, secondary or tertiary, depending on how many carbon atoms are joined to the carbon that holds the halogen (one, two or three).

    Three structures with the carbon holding the bromine highlighted: primary with one carbon attached, secondary with two, tertiary with three
    Primary, secondary and tertiary halogenoalkanes, set by how many carbons are joined to the carbon bearing the halogen
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    halogenoalkane 卤代烷 lǔ dài wán
    free-radical substitution 自由基取代 zì yóu jī qǔ dài
    electrophilic addition 亲电加成 qīn diàn jiā chéng
    alcohol chún
    primary
    secondary zhòng
    tertiary shū
    15.1

    Nucleophilic substitution

    The C–X bond is polar, so the carbon is slightly positive. A nucleophilic substitution 亲核取代 happens when a nucleophile 亲核试剂 (a lone-pair species) attacks that carbon and replaces the halogen.

    A round-bottomed flask of boiling liquid with a vertical condenser returning the vapour
    Many halogenoalkane reactions are carried out by heating the mixture under reflux
    Reagent and conditions Product
    $\text{NaOH(aq)}$, heat an alcohol
    $\text{KCN}$ in ethanol, heat a nitrile (adds one carbon to the chain)
    $\text{NH}_3$ in ethanol, heated under pressure an amine

    To identify the halogen, warm the halogenoalkane with silver nitrate 硝酸银 in ethanol. A silver halide precipitate 沉淀 forms, and its colour shows which halogen is present (white $\text{AgCl}$, cream $\text{AgBr}$, yellow $\text{AgI}$).

    Explore

    Nucleophilic substitution

    A nucleophile swaps in for the leaving group on a halogenoalkane.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    nucleophilic substitution 亲核取代 qīn hé qǔ dài
    nucleophile 亲核试剂 qīn hé shì jì
    nitrile jīng
    amine àn
    silver nitrate 硝酸银 xiāo suān yín
    precipitate 沉淀 chén diàn
    15.1

    Elimination

    The same halogenoalkane can instead undergo elimination 消去 to form an alkene 烯烃. The conditions decide which reaction wins:

    • $\text{NaOH}$ in water → nucleophilic substitution → an alcohol.
    • $\text{NaOH}$ in ethanol, heated → elimination → an alkene.
    $$\text{C}_2\text{H}_5\text{Br} + \text{NaOH} \rightarrow \text{C}_2\text{H}_4 + \text{NaBr} + \text{H}_2\text{O}$$
    A branching diagram: bromoethane with aqueous sodium hydroxide gives an alcohol by substitution, but with sodium hydroxide in ethanol gives an alkene by elimination
    The same halogenoalkane: NaOH in water substitutes to an alcohol, while NaOH in ethanol (with heat) eliminates to an alkene
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    elimination 消去 xiāo qù
    alkene 烯烃 xī tīng
    15.1

    The S$_\text{N}$1 and S$_\text{N}$2 mechanisms

    Nucleophilic substitution can follow two routes:

    • S$_\text{N}$2: one step. The nucleophile attacks at the same time as the halogen leaves, passing through a crowded transition state 过渡态 where both are half-bonded. The rate depends on both the halogenoalkane and the nucleophile.
    • S$_\text{N}$1: two steps. First the C–X bond breaks to give a carbocation 碳正离子; then the nucleophile attacks it. The rate depends only on the halogenoalkane.
    S N 2 shown as one step where the nucleophile attacks as the halogen leaves through a transition state; S N 1 shown as two steps through a carbocation
    S$_\text{N}$2 is a single step through a crowded transition state; S$_\text{N}$1 is two steps via a carbocation

    Alkyl groups push electrons towards the positive carbon (the inductive effect 诱导效应), so they stabilise the carbocation. This is why:

    • primary halogenoalkanes mostly react by S$_\text{N}$2.
    • tertiary halogenoalkanes mostly react by S$_\text{N}$1 (their carbocation is well stabilised).
    • secondary halogenoalkanes use a mixture of the two.
    Explore

    The SN2 mechanism, step by step

    Step through nucleophilic substitution. The nucleophile attacks from behind as the halide leaves — all in one smooth step, flipping the molecule inside-out.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    transition state 过渡态 guò dù tài
    carbocation 碳正离子 tàn zhèng lí zi
    inductive effect 诱导效应 yòu dǎo xiào yìng
    15.1

    Different reactivities

    How fast a halogenoalkane reacts depends on the strength of the C–X bond, measured by its bond energy 键能. The C–I bond is the weakest, so iodoalkanes react fastest; the C–Cl bond is the strongest of the three, so chloroalkanes react slowest. So when tested with silver nitrate, an iodoalkane gives its precipitate first — its higher reactivity 反应活性 comes from the weaker C–X bond.

    A bar chart of C-X bond energy falling from C-F to C-I, with an arrow noting that a weaker bond reacts faster
    The weaker the C–X bond, the faster the halogenoalkane reacts — so iodoalkanes react fastest and chloroalkanes slowest

    Worked example. Predict the mechanism for the hydrolysis of 1-bromobutane and of 2-bromo-2-methylpropane. Classify the halogenoalkane first. 1-bromobutane is primary: the carbon carrying the $\text{Br}$ is barely shielded, so the nucleophile can attack the back of it and the mechanism is $\text{S}_\text{N}2$ - one step, with the rate depending on both the halogenoalkane and the nucleophile. 2-bromo-2-methylpropane is tertiary: three bulky methyl groups block that attack, but they also stabilise the carbocation formed once the $\text{Br}$ leaves, so it goes $\text{S}_\text{N}1$ - two steps, with the rate depending on the halogenoalkane only. Decide from the class (primary → $\text{S}_\text{N}2$, tertiary → $\text{S}_\text{N}1$), and note that the tertiary one hydrolyses faster despite being the more crowded.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    bond energy 键能 jiàn néng
    reactivity 反应活性 fǎn yìng huó xìng
    15.1

    Exam tips

    • Draw nucleophilic substitution with a curly arrow from the nucleophile's lone pair to the $\delta+$ carbon and one from the $\text{C-X}$ bond.
    • Match mechanism to class: $S_\text{N}1$ (tertiary, carbocation, two steps) vs $S_\text{N}2$ (primary, one step, transition state).
    • Reactivity is set by bond enthalpy: $\text{C-I}$ is weakest, so iodoalkanes react fastest (not electronegativity).
    • Elimination (hot, ethanolic KOH) vs substitution (warm, aqueous KOH) — the conditions decide the product; state them.
  • 16 Hydroxy compounds
    16.1

    Alcohols

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions (reagents and conditions) by which alcohols can be produced: (a) electrophilic addition of steam to an alkene, $\text{H}_2\text{O(g)}$ and $\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$ catalyst (b) reaction of alkenes with cold dilute acidified potassium manganate(VII) to form a diol (c) substitution of a halogenoalkane using $\text{NaOH(aq)}$ and heat (d) reduction of an aldehyde or ketone using $\text{NaBH}_4$ or $\text{LiAlH}_4$ (e) reduction of a carboxylic acid using $\text{LiAlH}_4$ (f) hydrolysis of an ester using dilute acid or dilute alkali and heat
    2. describe: (a) the reaction with oxygen (combustion) (b) substitution to form halogenoalkanes, e.g. by reaction with $\text{HX(g)}$; or with $\text{KCl}$ and concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ or concentrated $\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$; or with $\text{PCl}_3$ and heat; or with $\text{PCl}_5$; or with $\text{SOCl}_2$ (c) the reaction with $\text{Na(s)}$ (d) oxidation with acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ or acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ to: (i) carbonyl compounds by distillation (ii) carboxylic acids by refluxing (primary alcohols give aldehydes which can be further oxidised to carboxylic acids, secondary alcohols give ketones, tertiary alcohols cannot be oxidised) (e) dehydration to an alkene, by using a heated catalyst, e.g. $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$ or a concentrated acid (f) formation of esters by reaction with carboxylic acids and concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ as catalyst as exemplified by ethanol
    3. (a) classify alcohols as primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols, to include examples with more than one alcohol group (b) state characteristic distinguishing reactions, e.g. mild oxidation with acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$, colour change from orange to green
    4. deduce the presence of a $\text{CH}_3\text{CH(OH)}-$ group in an alcohol, $\text{CH}_3\text{CH(OH)}-\text{R}$, from its reaction with alkaline $\text{I}_2\text{(aq)}$ to form a yellow precipitate of tri-iodomethane and an ion, $\text{RCO}_2^-$
    5. explain the acidity of alcohols compared with water

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An alcohol has the $\text{–OH}$ (hydroxyl) functional group.

    A hand-sanitiser bottle
    Ethanol, the alcohol in hand sanitiser, kills microbes

    Making alcohols

    Method Reagents and conditions
    addition of steam to an alkene $\text{H}_2\text{O(g)}$, $\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$ catalyst (electrophilic addition 亲电加成)
    an alkene 烯烃 with cold dilute $\text{KMnO}_4$ gives a diol 二醇 (two $\text{–OH}$ groups)
    substitution of a halogenoalkane 卤代烷 $\text{NaOH(aq)}$, heat
    reduction 还原 of an aldehyde or ketone $\text{NaBH}_4$ or $\text{LiAlH}_4$
    reduction of a carboxylic acid 羧酸 $\text{LiAlH}_4$
    hydrolysis 水解 of an ester dilute acid or alkali, heat

    Reactions of alcohols

    • combustion: alcohols burn in oxygen to give carbon dioxide and water.
    • substitution to a halogenoalkane, for example with $\text{HX}$, $\text{PCl}_5$, $\text{PCl}_3$ and heat, or $\text{SOCl}_2$.
    • with sodium: alcohols react with sodium metal to give hydrogen and a sodium alkoxide — like water, but more slowly.
    • oxidation 氧化 with acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ (or $\text{KMnO}_4$). The product depends on the class of alcohol (see below).
    • dehydration 脱水 to an alkene, using a hot $\text{Al}_2\text{O}_3$ catalyst or concentrated acid.
    • ester formation: an alcohol reacts with a carboxylic acid (with concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ catalyst) to make an ester.
    An alcohol reacting four ways: combustion, dehydration to an alkene, esterification, and oxidation
    An alcohol can burn, dehydrate, esterify or be oxidised

    Three classes and how oxidation tells them apart

    An alcohol is primary, secondary or tertiary, depending on how many carbons are joined to the carbon holding the $\text{–OH}$. Some molecules have more than one $\text{–OH}$ group.

    Three central carbons each holding an OH group: primary has one R group and two hydrogens, secondary two R groups and one hydrogen, tertiary three R groups
    The class is set by the carbon holding the –OH: one R group makes it primary, two secondary, three tertiary — which decides how it oxidises
    Class Oxidation product
    primary aldehyde (by distillation 蒸馏), then carboxylic acid (by reflux 回流)
    secondary a ketone
    tertiary not oxidised
    A scheme: a primary alcohol oxidising to an aldehyde then a carboxylic acid, a secondary alcohol to a ketone, and a tertiary alcohol not oxidised
    Oxidation by class: a primary alcohol gives an aldehyde then a carboxylic acid, a secondary gives a ketone, a tertiary is not oxidised

    In a quick test, acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ turns from orange to green with a primary or secondary alcohol, but stays orange with a tertiary alcohol.

    Two test tubes of orange dichromate: the one with a primary or secondary alcohol has turned green, the one with a tertiary alcohol is still orange
    Acidified dichromate turns orange to green with a primary or secondary alcohol, but stays orange with a tertiary alcohol
    • distillation removes the aldehyde as it forms, before it can be oxidised further.
    • reflux keeps boiling the mixture and returning the vapour, so the alcohol is fully oxidised to the carboxylic acid.
    Two sets of apparatus: reflux with a vertical condenser returning the vapour to the flask, and distillation with a sloping condenser leading to a collection flask
    Distillation removes the aldehyde as it forms; reflux keeps boiling and returning the vapour, fully oxidising to the acid
    A laboratory fractional-distillation column with a thermometer and water condenser
    A real distillation set-up: the vapour boils off, cools in the condenser and is collected — the same idea separates ethanol from a fermented mixture

    The iodoform test

    If you warm an alcohol that contains the $\text{CH}_3\text{CH(OH)}-$ group with alkaline aqueous iodine, you get a pale yellow precipitate of tri-iodomethane 三碘甲烷 ($\text{CHI}_3$) and the ion $\text{RCO}_2^-$. This is a useful test for that group.

    Acidity of alcohols

    The $\text{–OH}$ group makes alcohols very weakly acidic: they can lose the $\text{H}^+$ to form an $\text{RO}^-$ ion. But their acidity 酸性 is lower than that of water. This is because the alkyl group pushes electron density onto the oxygen, which makes the $\text{RO}^-$ ion less stable, so the alcohol holds onto its $\text{H}^+$ more tightly.

    Worked example. Three unlabelled bottles hold butan-1-ol, butan-2-ol and 2-methylpropan-2-ol. How does warming each with acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ tell them apart? What matters is how many hydrogens sit on the carbon carrying the $\text{OH}$. Butan-1-ol is primary (two such hydrogens): the orange dichromate turns green, and by distilling you collect an aldehyde (butanal), or by refluxing you get the carboxylic acid (butanoic acid). Butan-2-ol is secondary (one such hydrogen): also green, but the product is a ketone (butanone), which will not oxidise further. 2-methylpropan-2-ol is tertiary (no such hydrogen): there is nothing to remove, so the dichromate stays orange. The colour only separates the tertiary from the other two - to split primary from secondary you must identify the product (an aldehyde gives a silver mirror with Tollens', a ketone does not).

    Explore

    Alcohol reaction map

    Choose what happens to alcohols under different reagents.

    Explore

    Alcohol oxidation test lab

    Classify alcohols by oxidation product and observation.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    alcohol chún
    electrophilic addition 亲电加成 qīn diàn jiā chéng
    alkene 烯烃 xī tīng
    diol 二醇 èr chún
    halogenoalkane 卤代烷 lǔ dài wán
    reduction 还原 huán yuán
    aldehyde quán
    ketone tóng
    carboxylic acid 羧酸 suō suān
    hydrolysis 水解 shuǐ jiě
    ester zhǐ
    oxidation 氧化 yǎng huà
    dehydration 脱水 tuō shuǐ
    primary
    secondary zhòng
    tertiary shū
    distillation 蒸馏 zhēng liú
    reflux 回流 huí liú
    tri-iodomethane 三碘甲烷 sān diǎn jiǎ wán
    acidity 酸性 suān xìng
    16.1

    Exam tips

    • Classify the alcohol as primary, secondary or tertiary first — it decides the oxidation product.
    • Oxidation with acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ (orange → green): primary → aldehyde (distil) → acid (reflux); secondary → ketone; tertiary → no reaction.
    • Distinguish the conditions for aldehyde vs acid from a primary alcohol (distillation vs reflux).
    • Name esters correctly (the acid part comes second, ending "-oate").
  • 17 Carbonyl compounds
    17.1

    Aldehydes and ketones

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions (reagents and conditions) by which aldehydes and ketones can be produced: (a) the oxidation of primary alcohols using acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ or acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ and distillation to produce aldehydes (b) the oxidation of secondary alcohols using acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ or acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ and distillation to produce ketones
    2. describe: (a) the reduction of aldehydes and ketones using $\text{NaBH}_4$ or $\text{LiAlH}_4$ to produce alcohols (b) the reaction of aldehydes and ketones with $\text{HCN}$, $\text{KCN}$ as catalyst, and heat to produce hydroxynitriles as exemplified by ethanal and propanone
    3. describe the mechanism of the nucleophilic addition reactions of hydrogen cyanide with aldehydes and ketones in 17.1.2(b)
    4. describe the use of 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine (2,4-DNPH reagent) to detect the presence of carbonyl compounds
    5. deduce the nature (aldehyde or ketone) of an unknown carbonyl compound from the results of simple tests (Fehling's and Tollens' reagents; ease of oxidation)
    6. deduce the presence of a $\text{CH}_3\text{CO}-$ group in an aldehyde or ketone, $\text{CH}_3\text{CO}-\text{R}$, from its reaction with alkaline $\text{I}_2(\text{aq})$ to form a yellow precipitate of tri-iodomethane and an ion, $\text{RCO}_2^-$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Aldehydes and ketones are carbonyl compounds 羰基化合物 — they contain the C=O carbonyl 羰基 group.

    • in an aldehyde the carbonyl carbon is on the end of the chain (it also carries an H), written $\text{–CHO}$.
    • in a ketone the carbonyl carbon is in the middle, between two other carbons.
    A bottle of nail-polish remover beside cotton pads
    Propanone (acetone), the simplest ketone, is the solvent in nail-polish remover
    Ethanal with its C=O carbon on the end carrying an H, next to propanone with its C=O carbon in the middle between two carbons
    Both have the C=O carbonyl group: in an aldehyde it is on the end of the chain (–CHO), in a ketone it is in the middle

    Making aldehydes and ketones

    Both are made by the oxidation 氧化 of an alcohol with acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ or $\text{KMnO}_4$:

    • a primary alcohol, with distillation 蒸馏, gives an aldehyde.
    • a secondary alcohol gives a ketone.

    Reactions

    • reduction 还原 with $\text{NaBH}_4$ or $\text{LiAlH}_4$ turns a carbonyl compound back into an alcohol (an aldehyde gives a primary alcohol; a ketone gives a secondary alcohol).
    • reaction with hydrogen cyanide 氰化氢 ($\text{HCN}$), with $\text{KCN}$ as catalyst and heat, adds $\text{H}$ and $\text{CN}$ across the C=O to make a hydroxynitrile 羟基腈. This adds one carbon to the chain.

    The mechanism: nucleophilic addition

    The reaction with $\text{HCN}$ is a nucleophilic addition 亲核加成. The carbonyl carbon is slightly positive (oxygen pulls the electrons away). So:

    1. the $\text{CN}^-$ ion (a nucleophile) attacks the slightly positive carbon.
    2. this breaks the C=O double bond, leaving a negative oxygen ($\text{O}^-$).
    3. the $\text{O}^-$ takes an $\text{H}^+$ (from $\text{HCN}$) to finish the hydroxynitrile.
    The HCN addition mechanism: cyanide attacking the slightly positive carbonyl carbon, the C=O breaking to give a negative oxygen, then the oxygen taking a proton
    Nucleophilic addition of HCN: CN$^-$ attacks the $\delta+$ carbonyl carbon, the C=O breaks to O$^-$, then O$^-$ takes an H$^+$
    Explore

    Carbonyl compound lab

    Sort carbonyl reactions by what they reveal.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    carbonyl compound 羰基化合物 tāng jī huà hé wù
    carbonyl 羰基 tāng jī
    aldehyde quán
    ketone tóng
    oxidation 氧化 yǎng huà
    alcohol chún
    distillation 蒸馏 zhēng liú
    reduction 还原 huán yuán
    hydrogen cyanide 氰化氢 qíng huà qīng
    hydroxynitrile 羟基腈 qiǎng jī jīng
    nucleophilic addition 亲核加成 qīn hé jiā chéng
    17.1

    Tests for carbonyl compounds

    Detecting any carbonyl

    Add 2,4-DNPH reagent (2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine). An orange precipitate confirms that the compound is an aldehyde or a ketone.

    Telling an aldehyde from a ketone

    Aldehydes are easily oxidised to carboxylic acids, but ketones are not. Two tests use this difference:

    Test Aldehyde Ketone
    Fehling's reagent 斐林试剂 (blue solution) turns to a brick-red precipitate no change
    Tollens' reagent 托伦试剂 (colourless) gives a silver mirror no change
    Two test tubes: Fehling's solution giving a brick-red precipitate and Tollens' reagent giving a silver mirror, both with an aldehyde
    Telling an aldehyde from a ketone: an aldehyde gives a brick-red precipitate with Fehling's and a silver mirror with Tollens'; a ketone gives no change
    A test tube whose inner wall is coated with a bright, shiny silver layer, like a mirror
    A positive Tollens' test: an aldehyde coats the tube with a shiny silver mirror

    The iodoform test

    If the compound has the $\text{CH}_3\text{CO}-$ group, warming it with alkaline aqueous iodine gives a pale yellow precipitate of tri-iodomethane 三碘甲烷 ($\text{CHI}_3$) and the ion $\text{RCO}_2^-$.

    Worked example. A liquid gives an orange precipitate with 2,4-DNPH, gives no silver mirror with Tollens' reagent, and gives a yellow precipitate with alkaline aqueous iodine. Identify it. Take the tests one at a time, using each for exactly what it proves. The orange precipitate with 2,4-DNPH proves a carbonyl group is present - an aldehyde or a ketone, nothing else. No silver mirror with Tollens' rules out an aldehyde, so it must be a ketone. The yellow precipitate in the iodoform test proves a $\text{CH}_3\text{CO}-$ group next to the carbonyl. The simplest compound satisfying all three is propanone, $\text{CH}_3\text{COCH}_3$. Keep the roles straight: 2,4-DNPH finds any carbonyl, Tollens' separates aldehyde from ketone, and iodoform detects the methyl group beside the C=O.

    Explore

    Carbonyl test lab

    Match observations to aldehydes and ketones.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Fehling's reagent 斐林试剂 fěi lín shì jì
    Tollens' reagent 托伦试剂 tuō lún shì jì
    tri-iodomethane 三碘甲烷 sān diǎn jiǎ wán
    17.1

    Exam tips

    • 2,4-DNPH gives an orange precipitate with any carbonyl — it tests for $\text{C}=\text{O}$.
    • Tollens' (silver mirror) and Fehling's (brick-red) are positive for aldehydes only — this is how you tell aldehydes from ketones.
    • Nucleophilic addition of HCN adds one carbon (→ hydroxynitrile); show the curly arrows.
    • The iodoform (tri-iodomethane) test is positive for $\text{CH}_3\text{CO}-$ groups.
  • 18 Carboxylic acids and derivatives
    18.1

    Carboxylic acids

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions by which carboxylic acids can be produced: (a) oxidation of primary alcohols and aldehydes with acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ or acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ and refluxing (b) hydrolysis of nitriles with dilute acid or dilute alkali followed by acidification (c) hydrolysis of esters with dilute acid or dilute alkali and heat followed by acidification
    2. describe: (a) the redox reaction with reactive metals to produce a salt and $\text{H}_2(\text{g})$ (b) the neutralisation reaction with alkalis to produce a salt and $\text{H}_2\text{O}(\text{l})$ (c) the acid–base reaction with carbonates to produce a salt and $\text{H}_2\text{O}(\text{l})$ and $\text{CO}_2(\text{g})$ (d) esterification with alcohols with concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ as catalyst (e) reduction by $\text{LiAlH}_4$ to form a primary alcohol

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A carboxylic acid 羧酸 has the $\text{–COOH}$ (carboxyl) functional group. It is a weak acid.

    Bottles of vinegar on a shelf
    Vinegar is a dilute solution of ethanoic acid, a carboxylic acid

    Making carboxylic acids

    • oxidation 氧化 of a primary alcohol or an aldehyde with acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ or $\text{KMnO}_4$, with reflux 回流 (so it is fully oxidised).
    • hydrolysis 水解 of a nitrile with dilute acid or alkali, then acidifying.
    • hydrolysis of an ester with dilute acid or alkali and heat, then acidifying.

    Reactions of carboxylic acids

    These reactions all show that carboxylic acids are acids:

    • with a reactive metal (a redox 氧化还原 reaction): gives a salt and hydrogen.
    $$2\text{CH}_3\text{COOH} + \text{Mg} \rightarrow (\text{CH}_3\text{COO})_2\text{Mg} + \text{H}_2$$
    • with an alkali (a neutralisation 中和): gives a salt and water.
    $$\text{CH}_3\text{COOH} + \text{NaOH} \rightarrow \text{CH}_3\text{COONa} + \text{H}_2\text{O}$$
    • with a carbonate 碳酸盐: gives a salt, water and carbon dioxide. The fizzing of $\text{CO}_2$ is a test for a carboxylic acid.
    $$2\text{CH}_3\text{COOH} + \text{Na}_2\text{CO}_3 \rightarrow 2\text{CH}_3\text{COONa} + \text{H}_2\text{O} + \text{CO}_2$$
    A branching diagram showing a carboxylic acid reacting with a reactive metal, an alkali and a carbonate to give the labelled products
    Carboxylic acids behave as acids: a salt with a metal (+ H$_2$), with an alkali (+ water), or with a carbonate (+ water + CO$_2$ — the fizz is a test)

    Two reactions change the functional group:

    • esterification 酯化 with an alcohol (concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ catalyst) gives an ester.
    • reduction 还原 by $\text{LiAlH}_4$ gives a primary alcohol.
    Explore

    Carboxylic acid reaction map

    Follow carboxylic acids through neutralisation, esterification and reduction.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    carboxylic acid 羧酸 suō suān
    oxidation 氧化 yǎng huà
    alcohol chún
    aldehyde quán
    reflux 回流 huí liú
    hydrolysis 水解 shuǐ jiě
    nitrile jīng
    ester zhǐ
    redox 氧化还原 yǎng huà huán yuán
    salt yán
    neutralisation 中和 zhōng hé
    carbonate 碳酸盐 tàn suān yán
    esterification 酯化 zhǐ huà
    reduction 还原 huán yuán
    18.2

    Esters

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reaction (reagents and conditions) by which esters can be produced: (a) the condensation reaction between an alcohol and a carboxylic acid with concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ as catalyst
    2. describe the hydrolysis of esters by dilute acid and by dilute alkali and heat

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An ester has the $\text{–COO–}$ group. It often smells sweet or fruity.

    An ornate cut-glass perfume bottle
    Esters give many fruits and perfumes their sweet smell

    Making esters

    An ester forms in a condensation 缩合 reaction between an alcohol and a carboxylic acid, with concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ as catalyst. A water molecule is lost, and the reaction is reversible:

    $$\text{CH}_3\text{COOH} + \text{C}_2\text{H}_5\text{OH} \rightleftharpoons \text{CH}_3\text{COOC}_2\text{H}_5 + \text{H}_2\text{O}$$
    The esterification equation with the OH from the acid and the H from the alcohol highlighted as the atoms that leave as water, and the new ester oxygen link highlighted
    Esterification is a condensation: the –OH from the acid and the –H from the alcohol leave as water, forming the C–O–C ester link

    Hydrolysis of esters

    Hydrolysis splits the ester back apart. The conditions change the products:

    • dilute acid and heat: reversible. Gives back the carboxylic acid and the alcohol.
    • dilute alkali and heat: not reversible. Gives the alcohol and the salt of the carboxylic acid (the carboxylate ion).
    A branching diagram: an ester hydrolysed by dilute acid gives a carboxylic acid and alcohol, by dilute alkali gives a carboxylate salt and alcohol
    Hydrolysing an ester: dilute acid (reversible) gives the carboxylic acid and alcohol; dilute alkali (not reversible) gives the carboxylate salt and alcohol

    Worked example. Name the ester made from ethanol and propanoic acid, and say which part comes from which. In an ester name the alcohol gives the first word (the alkyl part) and the acid gives the second (the -oate part). Ethanol supplies $\text{C}_2\text{H}_5-$ and propanoic acid supplies $\text{CH}_3\text{CH}_2\text{COO}-$, so the ester is ethyl propanoate, $\text{CH}_3\text{CH}_2\text{COOC}_2\text{H}_5$. It is made by refluxing the two with a concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ catalyst, and the reaction is reversible, so the yield is never complete. The trap is naming it backwards: propyl ethanoate is a completely different ester (made from propan-1-ol and ethanoic acid). Alcohol first, acid second.

    Explore

    Ester route lab

    Follow ester formation and hydrolysis as reversible paths.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    condensation 缩合 suō hé
    18.2

    Exam tips

    • Carboxylic acids react with carbonates to give $\text{CO}_2$ (fizzing) — this distinguishes them from phenols.
    • Explain acid strength via the delocalised carboxylate ion; electron-withdrawing groups (e.g. Cl) increase strength.
    • Esterification (with concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$) is reversible; name esters as alkyl alkanoate.
    • Know the products of acid vs alkaline hydrolysis of an ester (they differ).
  • 19 Nitrogen compounds
    19.1

    Primary amines

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions by which amines can be produced: (a) reaction of a halogenoalkane with $\text{NH}_3$ in ethanol heated under pressure Classification of amines will not be tested at AS Level.

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An amine has an $\text{–NH}_2$ group (the nitrogen replaces a hydrogen of ammonia).

    Making a primary amine

    Heat a halogenoalkane 卤代烷 with ammonia dissolved in ethanol, under pressure:

    $$\text{C}_2\text{H}_5\text{Br} + \text{NH}_3 \rightarrow \text{C}_2\text{H}_5\text{NH}_2 + \text{HBr}$$

    This is a nucleophilic substitution 亲核取代: the lone pair on the nitrogen of ammonia attacks the slightly positive carbon and pushes out the halogen. You use an excess of ammonia, or the amine made can react again.

    A halogenoalkane reacting with ammonia: the nitrogen's lone pair attacks the slightly positive carbon and the bromine leaves, giving a primary amine and HBr
    Making a primary amine: ammonia's lone pair attacks the δ+ carbon and pushes out the halogen — a nucleophilic substitution
    Explore

    Amine reaction lab

    Classify amine examples by basicity and nucleophilic behaviour.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    amine àn
    halogenoalkane 卤代烷 lǔ dài wán
    nucleophilic substitution 亲核取代 qīn hé qǔ dài
    19.2

    Nitriles and hydroxynitriles

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions by which nitriles can be produced: (a) reaction of a halogenoalkane with $\text{KCN}$ in ethanol and heat
    2. recall the reactions by which hydroxynitriles can be produced: (a) the reaction of aldehydes and ketones with $\text{HCN}$, $\text{KCN}$ as catalyst, and heat
    3. describe the hydrolysis of nitriles with dilute acid or dilute alkali followed by acidification to produce a carboxylic acid

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Making a nitrile

    Heat a halogenoalkane with potassium cyanide ($\text{KCN}$) in ethanol:

    $$\text{C}_2\text{H}_5\text{Br} + \text{KCN} \rightarrow \text{C}_2\text{H}_5\text{CN} + \text{KBr}$$

    This is also a nucleophilic substitution, with the $\text{CN}^-$ ion as the nucleophile. It is useful because it adds one carbon to the chain. The product is a nitrile.

    Making a hydroxynitrile

    Add $\text{HCN}$ (with $\text{KCN}$ as catalyst, and heat) to an aldehyde or ketone. The $\text{H}$ and $\text{CN}$ add across the C=O bond to give a hydroxynitrile 羟基腈. The reagent is hydrogen cyanide 氰化氢, and the mechanism is nucleophilic addition 亲核加成.

    Two reactions: cyanide ion substituting a halogenoalkane to a nitrile, and hydrogen cyanide adding to a carbonyl to a hydroxynitrile
    Two ways cyanide adds a carbon: KCN with a halogenoalkane substitutes to a nitrile; HCN with a carbonyl adds to a hydroxynitrile

    Hydrolysis of nitriles

    Warm a nitrile with dilute acid (or dilute alkali, then acidify). This hydrolysis 水解 turns the $\text{–CN}$ group into a $\text{–COOH}$ group, giving a carboxylic acid 羧酸:

    $$\text{CH}_3\text{CN} + 2\text{H}_2\text{O} + \text{HCl} \rightarrow \text{CH}_3\text{COOH} + \text{NH}_4\text{Cl}$$

    A nitrile can also be reduced by hydrogen and a catalyst to form an amine, which is the reduction 还原 route to a longer-chain amine.

    A scheme: a halogenoalkane becoming a nitrile with KCN (adding one carbon), then the nitrile hydrolysing to a carboxylic acid or reducing to an amine
    Nitriles are a useful hub: KCN adds a carbon to make the nitrile, which then hydrolyses to a carboxylic acid or reduces to an amine
    A packet of nylon stockings
    Reducing a nitrile gives an amine; amines and diacids link up to make polyamides such as nylon — the fibre first made famous in stockings

    Worked example. Starting from bromoethane, make propanoic acid. Compare the carbons first: bromoethane has 2, propanoic acid has 3, so a carbon must be added - and the $\text{KCN}$ step is the reaction that does it. Step 1: warm bromoethane with ethanolic $\text{KCN}$; nucleophilic substitution gives propanenitrile, $\text{CH}_3\text{CH}_2\text{CN}$, which now has 3 carbons because the $\text{CN}$ carbon joins the chain. Step 2: reflux the nitrile with dilute $\text{HCl}$; hydrolysis gives propanoic acid. Count the carbons before you plan: whenever the target has exactly one more than the starting material, the nitrile route is almost always the intended answer, and remember the $\text{CN}$ carbon is part of the new chain.

    Explore

    Nitrile synthesis route

    Follow nitriles and hydroxynitriles as carbon-chain extension tools.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    nitrile jīng
    aldehyde quán
    ketone tóng
    hydroxynitrile 羟基腈 qiǎng jī jīng
    hydrogen cyanide 氰化氢 qíng huà qīng
    nucleophilic addition 亲核加成 qīn hé jiā chéng
    hydrolysis 水解 shuǐ jiě
    carboxylic acid 羧酸 suō suān
    reduction 还原 huán yuán
    19.2

    Exam tips

    • Amines are bases (the N lone pair accepts $\text{H}^+$); aliphatic amines are stronger bases than ammonia.
    • Making amines: reduce a nitrile, or react a halogenoalkane with excess ammonia.
    • KCN adds one carbon (halogenoalkane → nitrile) — track the carbon count carefully in synthesis routes.
    • State reagents and conditions precisely for each conversion.
  • 20 Polymerisation
    20.1

    Addition polymerisation

    Syllabus
    1. describe addition polymerisation as exemplified by poly(ethene) and poly(chloroethene), PVC
    2. deduce the repeat unit of an addition polymer obtained from a given monomer
    3. identify the monomer(s) present in a given section of an addition polymer molecule
    4. recognise the difficulty of the disposal of poly(alkene)s, i.e. non-biodegradability and harmful combustion products

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    In addition polymerisation 加成聚合, many small molecules join into one very long chain, with no other product made.

    Each small molecule is a monomer 单体. It must be unsaturated — it has a C=C double bond. The double bond opens up so that the monomers can link together. The long chain that forms is the polymer 聚合物.

    Several ethene monomers, each with a C=C double bond, opening their double bonds and joining end to end into one long polymer chain of single bonds
    Each monomer's double bond opens, and the monomers join end to end into one long chain — with no other product made
    A pile of small translucent poly(ethene) pellets next to a ruler showing they are a few millimetres across
    Poly(ethene), a common addition polymer, is supplied as tiny pellets a few millimetres across; these are later melted and moulded into bottles, bags and other products

    Repeat units

    The repeat unit 重复单元 is the small part that is copied again and again along the chain. To find it, take the monomer, change the C=C to a single C–C, and draw bonds going out at each end.

    • poly(ethene) 聚乙烯 is made from ethene:
    $$n\,\text{CH}_2{=}\text{CH}_2 \rightarrow -(\text{CH}_2{-}\text{CH}_2)_n-$$
    • poly(chloroethene) 聚氯乙烯 (PVC) is made from chloroethene:
    $$n\,\text{CH}_2{=}\text{CHCl} \rightarrow -(\text{CH}_2{-}\text{CHCl})_n-$$
    Chloroethene with its double bond on the left and the bracketed repeat unit of PVC on the right, with arrows for opening the C=C and putting it back
    Finding the repeat unit: change the monomer's C=C to a single bond and draw bonds out at each end; reverse it to find the monomer

    Finding the monomer

    To go the other way, look at one repeat unit of the polymer, and put the C=C double bond back in. That gives you the monomer.

    Worked example. A polymer has the repeat unit $-(\text{CH}_2{-}\text{CH}(\text{CH}_3))_n-$. Identify the monomer and name the polymer. Reverse the rule you used to build it: rub out the bonds sticking out at each end, and turn the single C-C in the backbone back into a C=C. That gives $\text{CH}_2{=}\text{CH}(\text{CH}_3)$, which is propene - so the polymer is poly(propene). Two checks catch most errors: the monomer must have the same molecular formula as the repeat unit (addition polymerisation adds nothing and loses nothing), and the double bond goes back into the backbone, never into the side group.

    Explore

    Addition polymerisation route

    Watch alkene monomers join by opening their double bonds.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    addition polymerisation 加成聚合 jiā chéng jù hé
    monomer 单体 dān tǐ
    polymer 聚合物 jù hé wù
    repeat unit 重复单元 chóng fù dān yuán
    poly(ethene) 聚乙烯 jù yǐ xī
    poly(chloroethene) 聚氯乙烯 jù lǜ yǐ xī
    20.1

    The problem of disposal

    Poly(alkene)s are very hard to get rid of:

    • they are non-biodegradable 不可生物降解 — microbes cannot break them down, so they stay in the ground for a very long time.
    • their combustion 燃烧 (burning) can release harmful gases. For example, burning PVC gives off toxic hydrogen chloride.
    Plastic waste washed up along a beach
    Most addition polymers are non-biodegradable, so they build up as waste in the environment
    A diagram showing poly(alkene) waste leading to two problems: non-biodegradable waste staying in landfill, and burning PVC releasing toxic HCl
    Poly(alkene) waste is hard to dispose of: it is non-biodegradable, and burning PVC releases toxic hydrogen chloride
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    non-biodegradable 不可生物降解 bù kě shēng wù jiàng jiě
    combustion 燃烧 rán shāo
    20.1

    Exam tips

    • Draw the repeat unit in brackets with the two bonds crossing them and $n$ outside; keep the backbone carbons.
    • Deduce the monomer from a polymer (and vice versa) — a very common question.
    • Addition polymers are inert and non-biodegradable — link to landfill, recycling and incineration issues.
    • Do not confuse with condensation (no small molecule is lost in addition polymerisation).
  • 21 Organic synthesis
    21.1

    Organic synthesis

    Syllabus
    1. for an organic molecule containing several functional groups: (a) identify organic functional groups using the reactions in the syllabus (b) predict properties and reactions
    2. devise multi-step synthetic routes for preparing organic molecules using the reactions in the syllabus
    3. analyse a given synthetic route in terms of type of reaction and reagents used for each step of it, and possible by-products

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    This topic does not add new reactions. Instead it asks you to join up the reactions you already know, so you can build a target molecule in several steps.

    White tablets in foil blister packs
    Medicines are built up from simple starting materials by multi-step organic synthesis

    Identifying functional groups

    A molecule may have more than one functional group 官能团. Use the test reactions from the syllabus to identify each one, and then predict how the molecule will behave. For example:

    • decolourises bromine water → a C=C double bond (an alkene 烯烃).
    • gives a precipitate with silver nitrate → a halogenoalkane 卤代烷.
    • orange $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ turns green → a primary or secondary alcohol.
    • orange precipitate with 2,4-DNPH → an aldehyde or ketone.
    • fizzes with a carbonate → a carboxylic acid 羧酸.
    A three-column table listing each test reagent, the observation it gives, and the functional group it identifies
    The standard identification tests: each reagent gives a characteristic observation that points to one functional group

    A map of the AS reactions

    Each row turns one functional group into another. Learn it as a map you can travel around:

    Start Reagent and conditions Product
    alkene $\text{H}_2$, Ni alkane
    alkene $\text{HX}$, or $\text{X}_2$ halogenoalkane
    alkene steam, $\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$ alcohol
    halogenoalkane $\text{NaOH(aq)}$, heat alcohol
    halogenoalkane $\text{KCN}$ in ethanol, heat a nitrile (adds one carbon)
    halogenoalkane $\text{NH}_3$ in ethanol, pressure an amine
    alcohol $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$, distil / reflux aldehyde / carboxylic acid
    alcohol concentrated acid, heat alkene
    aldehyde or ketone $\text{NaBH}_4$ alcohol
    aldehyde or ketone $\text{HCN}$, $\text{KCN}$ hydroxynitrile
    nitrile dilute acid, heat carboxylic acid
    carboxylic acid + alcohol concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ an ester
    A network diagram linking alkene, alkane, halogenoalkane, alcohol, aldehyde, nitrile, amine, carboxylic acid and ester by labelled reagent arrows
    A map of the AS reactions: each arrow turns one functional group into another. Work backwards from your target to plan a route

    Planning a multi-step route

    To devise a synthetic route 合成路线:

    1. compare the target with the starting material — what has changed (the functional group, the number of carbons)?
    2. work backwards from the target: which single reaction could make it, and from what?
    3. repeat until you reach the starting material.
    4. write each step with its reagent 试剂 and conditions.

    If you need to add a carbon, the $\text{KCN}$ step is the key — it is the only AS reaction that lengthens the chain.

    A synthesis chain from ethene to propanoic acid with the reagent on each forward step, and a large backward arrow showing the planning runs from the target back to the start
    Plan a route by working backwards from the target, one reaction at a time, until you reach the starting material

    Analysing a route

    When you are given a route, for each step state the type of reaction (such as oxidation 氧化, reduction 还原, substitution, addition or elimination) and the reagent used. Also think about possible by-products 副产物 — for example, making an amine from a halogenoalkane also gives a mixture of further-substituted amines, so the yield of the simple amine is low.

    For each step in a given route, ask three things: its reaction type, its reagent and conditions, and whether by-products lower the yield
    For every step in a given route, ask its reaction type, reagent and by-products
    The five reaction types with what each does: oxidation, reduction, substitution, addition and elimination
    Name the reaction type at each step: oxidation, reduction, substitution, addition or elimination

    Worked example. Devise a route from propene to propanone, $\text{CH}_3\text{COCH}_3$. Work backwards from the target. A ketone comes from oxidising a secondary alcohol, so the step before propanone is propan-2-ol with acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ under reflux. Propan-2-ol comes from propene by adding steam over an $\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$ catalyst - and Markovnikov's rule conveniently puts the $\text{OH}$ on the middle carbon, which is exactly the secondary alcohol needed. So the route is: propene, then steam with $\text{H}_3\text{PO}_4$, giving propan-2-ol; then acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ under reflux, giving propanone. Give a reagent and its conditions on every arrow: a route with the right intermediates but no reagents scores very little.

    Explore

    Reaction map lab

    Classify clues that identify functional groups and reaction pathways.

    Explore

    Synthetic route planning lab

    Follow how a target molecule is planned backwards then made forwards.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    functional group 官能团 guān néng tuán
    alkene 烯烃 xī tīng
    halogenoalkane 卤代烷 lǔ dài wán
    alcohol chún
    aldehyde quán
    ketone tóng
    carboxylic acid 羧酸 suō suān
    nitrile jīng
    amine àn
    ester zhǐ
    synthetic route 合成路线 hé chéng lù xiàn
    reagent 试剂 shì jì
    oxidation 氧化 yǎng huà
    reduction 还原 huán yuán
    by-product 副产物 fù chǎn wù
    21.1

    Exam tips

    • Learn the reagents and conditions for each conversion — that is exactly what synthesis questions test.
    • Plan multi-step routes by functional group and watch the carbon count (KCN adds one carbon).
    • Choose the shortest valid route and state every reagent and condition.
  • 22 Analytical techniques
    22.1

    Infrared spectroscopy

    Syllabus
    1. analyse an infrared spectrum of a simple molecule to identify functional groups (see the Data section for the functional groups required)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Infrared spectroscopy 红外光谱 helps you find the functional group 官能团 in a molecule. Each kind of bond soaks up (absorbs) infrared radiation at its own range of frequencies. Where the bond shows strong absorption 吸收, the spectrum has a dip.

    A benchtop infrared spectrometer in a laboratory
    An infrared spectrometer shines infrared through a sample and records which wavenumbers its bonds absorb

    The position is measured in wavenumber 波数 (in $\text{cm}^{-1}$). You are given a data table, so you do not memorise the numbers. You just match the dips to bonds:

    • a broad dip around $3200$$3650\ \text{cm}^{-1}$ → an O–H bond in an alcohol.
    • a dip around $1700\ \text{cm}^{-1}$ → a C=O bond (aldehyde, ketone, acid or ester).
    • a broad dip $2500$$3000\ \text{cm}^{-1}$ together with a C=O dip → a carboxylic acid.

    This is useful for checking a reaction. For example, if propene has been turned into propan-2-ol, the C=C dip should be gone and an O–H dip should appear.

    An infrared spectrum with transmittance dipping at a broad O-H band and a sharp C=O band
    An infrared spectrum: each bond gives a dip at its own wavenumber. A broad O–H dip together with a C=O dip identifies a carboxylic acid
    Explore

    IR spectroscopy lab

    Match an absorption to the bond or functional group it reveals.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    infrared spectroscopy 红外光谱 hóng wài guāng pǔ
    functional group 官能团 guān néng tuán
    absorption 吸收 xī shōu
    wavenumber 波数 bō shù
    22.2

    Mass spectrometry

    Syllabus
    1. analyse mass spectra in terms of $m/e$ values and isotopic abundances (knowledge of the working of the mass spectrometer is not required)
    2. calculate the relative atomic mass of an element given the relative abundances of its isotopes, or its mass spectrum
    3. deduce the molecular mass of an organic molecule from the molecular ion peak in a mass spectrum
    4. suggest the identity of molecules formed by simple fragmentation in a given mass spectrum
    5. deduce the number of carbon atoms, $n$, in a compound using the $[M + 1]^+$ peak and the formula
      $$n = \frac{100 \times \text{abundance of } [M + 1]^+ \text{ ion}}{1.1 \times \text{abundance of } M^+ \text{ ion}}$$
    6. deduce the presence of bromine and chlorine atoms in a compound using the $[M + 2]^+$ peak

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    In mass spectrometry 质谱, a molecule is turned into ions and sorted by its mass-to-charge ratio 质荷比 ($m/e$). The spectrum is a set of peaks at different $m/e$ values.

    A scientist in a laboratory loading a small sample into a large modern mass spectrometer
    A modern mass spectrometer: the sample is loaded at the front, then the machine ionises it and sorts the ions by their mass-to-charge ratio to give the spectrum

    Relative atomic mass from isotopes

    An element's isotope 同位素 mixture gives several peaks. From the isotopic abundance 同位素丰度 (how common each isotope is) you can find the relative atomic mass 相对原子质量 — a weighted average:

    $$A_r = \frac{\sum (\text{isotope mass} \times \text{abundance})}{\sum \text{abundance}}$$

    For example, chlorine is 75% $^{35}\text{Cl}$ and 25% $^{37}\text{Cl}$, giving $A_r = \dfrac{35 \times 75 + 37 \times 25}{100} = 35.5$.

    The molecular ion and fragmentation

    The peak at the highest $m/e$ (the molecular ion 分子离子 peak, or molecular ion peak 分子离子峰, $M^+$) gives the relative molecular mass of the whole molecule.

    The molecule also breaks into smaller pieces — this is fragmentation 碎裂. The gap between two peaks tells you the mass of the lost piece, so you can suggest each fragment 碎片. For example, a loss of 15 means a $\text{CH}_3$ group was lost, and a loss of 29 means $\text{CHO}$ or $\text{C}_2\text{H}_5$.

    A mass spectrum of ethanol with peaks at several m/e values, the molecular ion at 46 marked and a gap of 15 from 46 to 31 labelled as the loss of a methyl group
    A mass spectrum: the highest-$m/e$ peak is the molecular ion ($M^+$, the $M_r$); the gaps between peaks give the masses of the lost fragments

    The [M + 1] and [M + 2] peaks

    • a small [M + 1] peak comes from the $^{13}\text{C}$ isotope. The number of carbon atoms $n$ is:
    $$n = \frac{100 \times \text{abundance of } [M + 1]^+}{1.1 \times \text{abundance of } M^+}$$
    • an [M + 2] peak shows chlorine or bromine. One chlorine gives an $[M + 2]$ peak about one third the height of $M^+$ (from $^{37}\text{Cl}$); one bromine gives an $[M + 2]$ peak about the same height as $M^+$ (from $^{81}\text{Br}$).
    Two pairs of mass-spectrum peaks two units apart: a chlorine pair in a 3 to 1 ratio and a bromine pair in a 1 to 1 ratio
    An $[M+2]$ peak two mass units above $M^+$ shows a halogen: one chlorine gives a $3:1$ ratio, one bromine a $1:1$ ratio

    Worked example. A compound shows a molecular ion at $m/e = 108$ and a peak of almost equal height at $m/e = 110$. Its infrared spectrum shows no broad absorption near $3300\ \text{cm}^{-1}$. Deduce its identity. Two peaks two units apart with roughly equal heights are the $1:1$ signature of one bromine atom (from $^{79}\text{Br}$ and $^{81}\text{Br}$); one chlorine would have given a $3:1$ ratio instead. Take the bromine away from the molecular ion: $108 - 79 = 29$, which fits a $\text{C}_2\text{H}_5$ fragment. The absence of a broad peak near $3300\ \text{cm}^{-1}$ rules out an $\text{O-H}$, so there is no alcohol group. The compound is bromoethane, $\text{C}_2\text{H}_5\text{Br}$. Read the $[M+2]$ ratio rather than merely noting the peak: $1:1$ means bromine, $3:1$ means chlorine.

    Explore

    Mass spectrometry route

    Follow a molecule through ionisation, separation and detection.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mass spectrometry 质谱 zhì pǔ
    mass-to-charge ratio 质荷比 zhì hé bǐ
    isotope 同位素 tóng wèi sù
    isotopic abundance 同位素丰度 tóng wèi sù fēng dù
    relative atomic mass 相对原子质量 xiāng duì yuán zi zhì liàng
    molecular ion 分子离子 fèn zǐ lí zi
    molecular ion peak 分子离子峰 fèn zǐ lí zi fēng
    fragmentation 碎裂 suì liè
    fragment 碎片 suì piàn
    Exercise sheet
    22.2

    Exam tips

    • On an IR spectrum quote the wavenumber and the bond (O-H broad $\sim 3200-3600$, C=O $\sim 1700$); use the data booklet.
    • The peak at the highest $m/z$ is the molecular ion $\text{M}^+$ and gives the $M_r$.
    • Explain fragmentation: the gap between peaks is the lost fragment (loss of 15 = $\text{CH}_3$, 29 = $\text{C}_2\text{H}_5$ or CHO).
    • Learn common isotope patterns (Cl gives M and M+2 in about 3:1; M+1 from $^{13}\text{C}$).
  • 23 Chemical energetics
    23.1

    Lattice energy and Born–Haber cycles

    Syllabus
    1. define and use the terms: (a) enthalpy change of atomisation, $\Delta H_{\text{at}}$ (b) lattice energy, $\Delta H_{\text{latt}}$ (the change from gas phase ions to solid lattice)
    2. (a) define and use the term first electron affinity, EA (b) explain the factors affecting the electron affinities of elements (c) describe and explain the trends in the electron affinities of the Group 16 and Group 17 elements
    3. construct and use Born–Haber cycles for ionic solids (limited to +1 and +2 cations, –1 and –2 anions)
    4. carry out calculations involving Born–Haber cycles
    5. explain, in qualitative terms, the effect of ionic charge and of ionic radius on the numerical magnitude of a lattice energy

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    These cycles use several enthalpy changes 焓变 ($\Delta H$). Two new ones are:

    • the enthalpy change of atomisation 原子化焓变, $\Delta H_{\text{at}}$ — the energy to make one mole of gaseous atoms from an element. It is always positive (bonds must break).
    • the lattice energy 晶格能, $\Delta H_{\text{latt}}$ — the energy change when one mole of a solid ionic lattice forms from its gaseous ions. It is always negative (strong bonds form).
    Clear cubic crystals of halite (rock salt)
    An ionic solid such as sodium chloride is a giant, regular lattice of ions — the lattice energy is released when it forms

    Electron affinity

    The first electron affinity 电子亲和能 (EA) is the energy change when one mole of gaseous atoms each gain one electron to form one mole of $1-$ ions. The first EA is usually negative.

    A gaseous atom gains an electron to form a 1- ion, usually releasing energy
    A gaseous atom gains an electron, usually releasing energy

    The same factors as ionisation energy apply (nuclear charge, atomic radius, shielding). Going down Group 16 or 17, the EA becomes less exothermic, because the atom is larger and pulls the extra electron in less strongly. (The very top element is an exception: its atom is so small that electron repulsion makes its EA less exothermic than the one below it.)

    Born–Haber cycles

    A Born–Haber cycle 玻恩哈伯循环 is an energy cycle that links the enthalpy change of formation of an ionic solid with its atomisation, ionisation energy, electron affinity and lattice energy. Using Hess's law, you go round the cycle to find any one unknown step. (You only need $+1$ and $+2$ cations and $-1$ and $-2$ anions.)

    An energy-level diagram for sodium chloride showing the steps up (atomisation, ionisation) and down (electron affinity, lattice energy) and the direct formation step
    A Born–Haber cycle for NaCl: going up costs energy (atomisation, ionisation); coming down releases it (electron affinity, and the large lattice energy)

    Worked example. Find the lattice energy of sodium chloride from these data (kJ mol⁻¹): enthalpy of formation $\Delta H_f = -411$; atomisation $\Delta H_{\text{at}}(\text{Na}) = +107$ and $\Delta H_{\text{at}}(\text{Cl}) = +122$; first ionisation energy of Na $= +496$; electron affinity of Cl $= -349$.

    By Hess's law the direct formation route equals the route up and round the cycle:

    $$\Delta H_f = \Delta H_{\text{at}}(\text{Na}) + \Delta H_{\text{at}}(\text{Cl}) + \text{IE}_1 + \text{EA} + \Delta H_{\text{latt}},$$

    so $\Delta H_{\text{latt}} = -411 - (107 + 122 + 496 - 349) = -787\ \text{kJ mol}^{-1}.$

    What controls the size of a lattice energy

    The lattice energy is more negative (stronger) when:

    Smaller ions and higher charges give a stronger lattice energy
    Smaller ions and higher charges give a stronger lattice energy
    • the ionic charge is higher (e.g. $\text{Mg}^{2+}$ beats $\text{Na}^+$).
    • the ionic radius is smaller.

    Both make the attraction between the ions stronger.

    Explore

    The Born–Haber cycle

    Lattice energy can't be measured directly, so it is found from a cycle of measurable steps.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    enthalpy change 焓变 hán biàn
    enthalpy change of atomisation 原子化焓变 yuán zi huà hán biàn
    lattice energy 晶格能 jīng gé néng
    electron affinity 电子亲和能 diàn zi qīn hé néng
    Born–Haber cycle 玻恩哈伯循环 bō ēn hā bó xún huán
    23.2

    Enthalpies of solution and hydration

    Syllabus
    1. define and use the term enthalpy change with reference to hydration, $\Delta H_{\text{hyd}}$, and solution, $\Delta H_{\text{sol}}$
    2. construct and use an energy cycle involving enthalpy change of solution, lattice energy and enthalpy change of hydration
    3. carry out calculations involving the energy cycles in 23.2.2
    4. explain, in qualitative terms, the effect of ionic charge and of ionic radius on the numerical magnitude of an enthalpy change of hydration

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    • the enthalpy change of hydration 水合焓变, $\Delta H_{\text{hyd}}$ — the energy change when one mole of gaseous ions is surrounded by water to form aqueous ions. It is exothermic.
    • the enthalpy change of solution 溶解焓变, $\Delta H_{\text{sol}}$ — the energy change when one mole of solute dissolves fully in water.
    An instant cold pack
    An instant cold pack feels cold because its salt dissolves endothermically (a positive $\Delta H_\text{sol}$), driven by the rise in entropy

    An energy cycle links the three:

    $$\Delta H_{\text{sol}} = -\Delta H_{\text{latt}} + \Delta H_{\text{hyd}}$$

    (To dissolve, you first pull the lattice apart, then hydrate the ions.) Like lattice energy, $\Delta H_{\text{hyd}}$ is more exothermic for ions with a higher charge and a smaller radius.

    A triangular energy cycle linking the ionic solid, the gaseous ions and the aqueous ions by the lattice, hydration and solution enthalpies
    Dissolving energy cycle: pull the lattice apart (reverse lattice energy), then hydrate the gaseous ions, so $\Delta H_\text{sol} = -\Delta H_\text{latt} + \Delta H_\text{hyd}$
    Explore

    Enthalpy of solution lab

    deltaHsol = lattice + hydration terms

    Change hydration strength and see solution enthalpy shift.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    enthalpy change of hydration 水合焓变 shuǐ hé hán biàn
    enthalpy change of solution 溶解焓变 róng jiě hán biàn
    23.3

    Entropy change, ΔS

    Syllabus
    1. define the term entropy, $S$, as the number of possible arrangements of the particles and their energy in a given system
    2. predict and explain the sign of the entropy changes that occur: (a) during a change in state, e.g. melting, boiling and dissolving (and their reverse) (b) during a temperature change (c) during a reaction in which there is a change in the number of gaseous molecules
    3. calculate the entropy change for a reaction, $\Delta S$, given the standard entropies, $S^\ominus$, of the reactants and products, $\Delta S^\ominus = \Sigma S^\ominus \text{(products)} - \Sigma S^\ominus \text{(reactants)}$ (use of $\Delta S^\ominus = \Delta S^\ominus_{\text{surr}} + \Delta S^\ominus_{\text{sys}}$ is not required)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Entropy ($S$) measures the number of ways the particles and their energy can be arranged in a system. More ways means more "disorder".

    Three boxes of particles: an ordered solid grid, a clustered liquid, and a spread-out gas, with arrows showing entropy increasing
    Entropy rises from solid to liquid to gas as the particles spread into more arrangements, so $\Delta S$ is positive

    The entropy change 熵变 ($\Delta S$) is positive when disorder increases, and negative when it falls:

    Change Sign of $\Delta S$
    solid → liquid → gas (melting, boiling), or dissolving positive
    a rise in temperature positive
    a reaction that makes more gas molecules positive
    a reaction that makes fewer gas molecules negative

    You can calculate it from standard entropies:

    $$\Delta S^{\ominus} = \sum S^{\ominus}(\text{products}) - \sum S^{\ominus}(\text{reactants})$$
    Explore

    Entropy change lab

    deltaS = products disorder - reactants disorder

    Increase disorder and see entropy change become more positive.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    entropy shāng
    entropy change 熵变 shāng biàn
    23.4

    Gibbs free energy change, ΔG

    Syllabus
    1. state and use the Gibbs equation $\Delta G^\ominus = \Delta H^\ominus - T\Delta S^\ominus$
    2. perform calculations using the equation $\Delta G^\ominus = \Delta H^\ominus - T\Delta S^\ominus$
    3. state whether a reaction or process will be feasible by using the sign of $\Delta G$
    4. predict the effect of temperature change on the feasibility of a reaction, given standard enthalpy and entropy changes

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The Gibbs free energy 吉布斯自由能 change decides whether a reaction can happen on its own:

    $$\Delta G^{\ominus} = \Delta H^{\ominus} - T\Delta S^{\ominus}$$

    Here $T$ is the temperature in kelvin. A reaction is feasible (it can happen) when $\Delta G$ is negative or zero. The feasibility 可行性 therefore depends on temperature:

    $\Delta H$ $\Delta S$ When feasible
    negative positive at all temperatures
    positive positive only at high temperature
    negative negative only at low temperature
    positive negative never
    A two-by-two grid of the signs of enthalpy change and entropy change, each cell saying when the reaction is feasible
    Whether a reaction is feasible ($\Delta G \leq 0$) depends on the signs of $\Delta H$ and $\Delta S$, and sometimes on temperature

    To find the changeover temperature, set $\Delta G = 0$, which gives $T = \Delta H / \Delta S$.

    Worked example. A reaction has $\Delta H = +120\ \text{kJ mol}^{-1}$ and $\Delta S = +200\ \text{J K}^{-1}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$. Find $\Delta G$ at $298\ \text{K}$, and the temperature above which the reaction becomes feasible.

    First match the units: $\Delta S = +0.200\ \text{kJ K}^{-1}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$. Then

    $$\Delta G = \Delta H - T\Delta S = 120 - 298 \times 0.200 = +60\ \text{kJ mol}^{-1}\quad(\text{positive, so not yet feasible}).$$

    Setting $\Delta G = 0$ gives $T = \Delta H/\Delta S = 120/0.200 = 600\ \text{K}$, so the reaction is feasible above $600\ \text{K}$.

    Explore

    Gibbs free energy lab

    deltaG = deltaH - T deltaS

    Move temperature and see when deltaG becomes negative.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Gibbs free energy 吉布斯自由能 jí bù sī zì yóu néng
    feasibility 可行性 kě xíng xìng
    23.4

    Exam tips

    • In a Born-Haber cycle get each step's direction and sign right (atomisation, ionisation $+$; electron affinity, lattice formation $-$) and apply Hess's law around it.
    • Lattice energy is more exothermic for smaller, more highly charged ions (higher charge density).
    • Predict the sign of $\Delta S$ from the state changes (more gas moles = more disorder).
    • Use $\Delta G = \Delta H - T\Delta S$; feasible when $\Delta G \le 0$ — convert $\Delta S$ from $\text{J K}^{-1}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$ ($\div 1000$).
  • 24 Electrochemistry
    24.1

    Electrolysis

    Syllabus
    1. predict the identities of substances liberated during electrolysis from the state of electrolyte (molten or aqueous), position in the redox series (electrode potential) and concentration
    2. state and apply the relationship $F = Le$ between the Faraday constant, $F$, the Avogadro constant, $L$, and the charge on the electron, $e$
    3. calculate: (a) the quantity of charge passed during electrolysis, using $Q = It$ (b) the mass and/or volume of substance liberated during electrolysis
    4. describe the determination of a value of the Avogadro constant by an electrolytic method

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Electrolysis: ions discharge at the electrodes

    Electrolysis 电解 uses electricity to break down a molten or aqueous electrolyte 电解质. Positive ions move to the negative electrode and negative ions move to the positive electrode.

    At each electrode 电极 a half-reaction happens:

    • at the cathode 阴极 (negative): positive ions gain electrons (reduction).
    • at the anode 阳极 (positive): negative ions lose electrons (oxidation).
    An electrolysis cell: a DC supply connected to two electrodes in an electrolyte, with positive ions moving to the cathode and negative ions to the anode
    Electrolysis: the DC supply drives positive ions to the cathode (reduction) and negative ions to the anode (oxidation)
    A glass Hofmann voltameter on a stand, wired to a power supply, with a gas-collection tube on each side
    A Hofmann voltameter for the electrolysis of water: the power supply drives current through two electrodes, and the gas made at each one collects in its side tube

    Predicting the products

    • a molten electrolyte gives the metal at the cathode and the non-metal at the anode.
    • an aqueous electrolyte also contains water. At the cathode, a less reactive metal is released, but for a reactive metal you get hydrogen instead. At the anode you usually get oxygen, but a concentrated halide solution gives the halogen.
    A molten electrolyte gives the metal and non-metal; an aqueous one also contains water
    A molten electrolyte gives the metal and non-metal; aqueous also has water

    Calculations

    The charge on one mole of electrons is the Faraday constant 法拉第常量, linked to the Avogadro constant 阿伏伽德罗常量 ($L$) and the charge on one electron ($e$) by $F = Le$.

    The charge passed is $Q = It$ (current $\times$ time). Then:

    1. moles of electrons $= Q / F$.
    2. use the half-equation to find moles of product.
    3. find the mass ($\times M_r$) or the gas volume.

    Measuring the mass deposited for a known charge lets you work back to a value of the Avogadro constant.

    Worked example. A current of $2.0\ \text{A}$ flows for $30$ minutes through copper(II) sulfate solution, depositing copper at the cathode: $\text{Cu}^{2+} + 2\text{e}^- \rightarrow \text{Cu}$. Find the mass of copper deposited. ($F = 96\,500\ \text{C mol}^{-1}$, $A_r$ Cu $= 64$.)

    Charge passed: $Q = It = 2.0 \times (30 \times 60) = 3600\ \text{C}$. Moles of electrons $= Q/F = 3600/96\,500 = 0.0373\ \text{mol}$. From the half-equation, $2\ \text{mol}$ of electrons give $1\ \text{mol}$ of Cu, so $n(\text{Cu}) = 0.0187\ \text{mol}$ and

    $$m = nM = 0.0187 \times 64 \approx 1.2\ \text{g}.$$
    A barrel-plating machine electroplating small parts
    Electrolysis is used to electroplate an object with a thin, shiny layer of metal such as chromium
    Explore

    Faraday's first law

    m = k·Q

    Mass deposited is proportional to the charge passed (Faraday's law).

    Explore

    Inside an electrolysis cell

    Choose an electrolyte and watch the ions move: cations to the cathode, anions to the anode, where they are discharged.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electrolysis 电解 diàn jiě
    electrolyte 电解质 diàn jiě zhì
    electrode 电极 diàn jí
    cathode 阴极 yīn jí
    anode 阳极 yáng jí
    Faraday constant 法拉第常量 fǎ lā dì cháng liàng
    Avogadro constant 阿伏伽德罗常量 ā fú gā dé luó cháng liàng
    24.2

    Standard electrode potentials and cell potentials

    Syllabus
    1. define the terms: (a) standard electrode (reduction) potential (b) standard cell potential
    2. describe the standard hydrogen electrode
    3. describe methods used to measure the standard electrode potentials of: (a) metals or non-metals in contact with their ions in aqueous solution (b) ions of the same element in different oxidation states
    4. calculate a standard cell potential by combining two standard electrode potentials
    5. use standard cell potentials to: (a) deduce the polarity of each electrode and hence explain/deduce the direction of electron flow in the external circuit of a simple cell (b) predict the feasibility of a reaction
    6. deduce from $E^{\ominus}$ values the relative reactivity of elements, compounds and ions as oxidising agents or as reducing agents
    7. construct redox equations using the relevant half-equations
    8. predict qualitatively how the value of an electrode potential, $E$, varies with the concentrations of the aqueous ions
    9. use the Nernst equation, e.g. $E = E^{\ominus} + (0.059/z) \log \frac{[\text{oxidised species}]}{[\text{reduced species}]}$, to predict quantitatively how the value of an electrode potential varies with the concentrations of the aqueous ions; examples include $\text{Cu}^{2+}(\text{aq}) + 2\text{e}^- \rightleftharpoons \text{Cu}(\text{s})$, $\text{Fe}^{3+}(\text{aq}) + \text{e}^- \rightleftharpoons \text{Fe}^{2+}(\text{aq})$
    10. understand and use the equation $\Delta G^{\ominus} = -n E^{\ominus}_{\text{cell}} F$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The electrode potential 电极电势 ($E$) of a half-cell shows how easily it is reduced. We measure it against a reference, under standard conditions, to get the standard electrode potential 标准电极电势 ($E^{\ominus}$), always written as a reduction.

    The reference is the standard hydrogen electrode 标准氢电极: hydrogen gas at $1\ \text{atm}$ over platinum in $1\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}$ $\text{H}^+$, defined as exactly $0.00\ \text{V}$.

    Hydrogen gas bubbling over a platinum electrode in acid inside a glass tube, the whole cell labelled 0.00 volts
    The standard hydrogen electrode: H$_2$ at 1 atm over platinum in 1 mol dm$^{-3}$ H$^+$, the $0.00$ V reference for every electrode potential

    To measure an $E^{\ominus}$, connect the half-cell to the standard hydrogen electrode and read the voltage. A metal sits in a solution of its ions; for two ions of the same element (such as $\text{Fe}^{3+}/\text{Fe}^{2+}$), a platinum electrode dips into a solution containing both.

    Combining half-cells

    The standard cell potential 标准电池电势 is the difference between the two standard electrode potentials:

    $$E^{\ominus}_{\text{cell}} = E^{\ominus}(\text{more positive}) - E^{\ominus}(\text{less positive})$$
    A zinc half-cell and a copper half-cell joined by a salt bridge and a voltmeter, with electrons flowing from zinc to copper through the wire
    A simple cell: two half-cells joined by a salt bridge, with a voltmeter. Electrons flow from the negative (Zn) electrode to the positive (Cu)

    Worked example. Find the standard cell potential of a cell built from the $\text{Zn}^{2+}/\text{Zn}$ half-cell ($E^{\ominus} = -0.76\ \text{V}$) and the $\text{Cu}^{2+}/\text{Cu}$ half-cell ($E^{\ominus} = +0.34\ \text{V}$).

    $$E^{\ominus}_{\text{cell}} = E^{\ominus}(\text{more positive}) - E^{\ominus}(\text{less positive}) = (+0.34) - (-0.76) = 1.10\ \text{V}.$$

    From $E^{\ominus}$ values you can:

    • find the polarity: the more negative electrode is the negative terminal, and electrons flow from it through the external circuit to the positive electrode.
    • judge reactivity: a more positive $E^{\ominus}$ means a better oxidising agent 氧化剂 (easily reduced); a more negative $E^{\ominus}$ means a better reducing agent 还原剂.
    A vertical scale of standard electrode potentials from fluorine at the top to sodium at the bottom, with arrows for stronger oxidising agent up and stronger reducing agent down
    The electrochemical series: a more positive $E^{\ominus}$ (top) is a stronger oxidising agent; a more negative $E^{\ominus}$ (bottom) is a stronger reducing agent

    Feasibility and redox equations

    A reaction is feasible when $E^{\ominus}_{\text{cell}}$ is positive. To build the full equation, take the two half-equations 半反应方程式, reverse the one that is oxidised, and add them so the electrons cancel. This $E^{\ominus}$ test tells you the feasibility 可行性 of the reaction.

    You can also link it to free energy: $\Delta G^{\ominus} = -n E^{\ominus}_{\text{cell}} F$, where $n$ is the moles of electrons.

    The Nernst equation

    If the concentrations are not standard, the electrode potential changes. Raising the concentration of the oxidised species makes $E$ more positive. The Nernst equation 能斯特方程 gives the exact value:

    $$E = E^{\ominus} + \frac{0.059}{z} \log \frac{[\text{oxidised species}]}{[\text{reduced species}]}$$

    where $z$ is the number of electrons in the half-equation.

    Explore

    Electrode potential lab

    Ecell = Eright - Eleft

    Change cell potential and see oxidising power increase.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electrode potential 电极电势 diàn jí diàn shì
    standard electrode potential 标准电极电势 biāo zhǔn diàn jí diàn shì
    standard hydrogen electrode 标准氢电极 biāo zhǔn qīng diàn jí
    standard cell potential 标准电池电势 biāo zhǔn diàn chí diàn shì
    oxidising agent 氧化剂 yǎng huà jì
    reducing agent 还原剂 huán yuán jì
    half-equation 半反应方程式 bàn fǎn yìng fāng chéng shì
    feasibility 可行性 kě xíng xìng
    Nernst equation 能斯特方程 néng sī tè fāng chéng
    24.2

    Exam tips

    • $E^{\ominus}_{\text{cell}} = E^{\ominus}(\text{more positive}) - E^{\ominus}(\text{less positive})$; a positive $E^{\ominus}_{\text{cell}}$ means the reaction is feasible.
    • Standard conditions for $E^{\ominus}$: 298 K, $1\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}$, 100 kPa, platinum electrode — state them if asked.
    • A more negative electrode potential means a stronger reducing agent; use the series to predict the direction.
    • For electrolysis quantities use $Q = It$ and moles of electrons $= Q/F$.
  • 25 Equilibria
    25.1

    Conjugate acids and bases

    Syllabus
    1. understand and use the terms conjugate acid and conjugate base
    2. define conjugate acid–base pairs, identifying such pairs in reactions
    3. define mathematically the terms pH, $K_a$, $\text{p}K_a$ and $K_w$ and use them in calculations ($K_b$ and the equation $K_w = K_a \times K_b$ will not be tested)
    4. calculate $[\text{H}^+(\text{aq})]$ and pH values for: (a) strong acids (b) strong alkalis (c) weak acids
    5. (a) define a buffer solution (b) explain how a buffer solution can be made (c) explain how buffer solutions control pH; use chemical equations in these explanations (d) describe and explain the uses of buffer solutions, including the role of $\text{HCO}_3^-$ in controlling pH in blood
    6. calculate the pH of buffer solutions, given appropriate data
    7. understand and use the term solubility product, $K_{\text{sp}}$
    8. write an expression for $K_{\text{sp}}$
    9. calculate $K_{\text{sp}}$ from concentrations and vice versa
    10. (a) understand and use the common ion effect to explain the different solubility of a compound in a solution containing a common ion (b) perform calculations using $K_{\text{sp}}$ values and concentration of a common ion

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Titration curve and equivalence point

    When a Brønsted acid loses an $\text{H}^+$, what is left is its conjugate base 共轭碱. When a base gains an $\text{H}^+$, it becomes its conjugate acid 共轭酸. The two species that differ by just one $\text{H}^+$ form a conjugate acid–base pair 共轭酸碱对.

    For example, in $\text{CH}_3\text{COOH} \rightleftharpoons \text{CH}_3\text{COO}^- + \text{H}^+$, the pair is $\text{CH}_3\text{COOH}$ (acid) and $\text{CH}_3\text{COO}^-$ (its conjugate base).

    Ethanoic acid losing a proton to its conjugate base, and ammonia gaining a proton to its conjugate acid, with the conjugate pair bracketed
    Conjugate pairs differ by one proton: an acid loses H$^+$ to give its conjugate base; a base gains H$^+$ to give its conjugate acid
    Explore

    pH and H⁺ concentration

    pH = −log[H⁺]: slide it and watch [H⁺] change tenfold per unit. A conjugate acid–base pair differ by a single proton.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    conjugate base 共轭碱 gòng è jiǎn
    conjugate acid 共轭酸 gòng è suān
    conjugate acid–base pair 共轭酸碱对 gòng è suān jiǎn duì
    Exercise sheet
    25.1

    pH and the equilibrium constants

    • pH measures acidity: $\text{pH} = -\log[\text{H}^+]$, so $[\text{H}^+] = 10^{-\text{pH}}$.
    • the acid dissociation constant 酸解离常数 of a weak acid $\text{HA}$ is $K_a = \dfrac{[\text{H}^+][\text{A}^-]}{[\text{HA}]}$, and $\text{p}K_a = -\log K_a$. A larger $K_a$ (smaller $\text{p}K_a$) means a stronger acid.
    • the ionic product of water 水的离子积 is $K_w = [\text{H}^+][\text{OH}^-] = 1.0 \times 10^{-14}$ at $298\ \text{K}$.
    The pH scale runs from acidic through neutral to alkaline, with pH = -log of the hydrogen ion concentration
    The pH scale: pH = -log of the hydrogen-ion concentration
    pH paper strips beside a colour chart
    pH paper estimates the pH of a solution from the colour it turns

    Calculating pH

    • strong acid 强酸: fully ionised, so $[\text{H}^+]$ equals the acid concentration; then take $-\log$.
    • strong alkali 强碱: find $[\text{OH}^-]$ from the concentration, then use $[\text{H}^+] = K_w / [\text{OH}^-]$.
    • weak acid 弱酸: only partly ionised, so use $[\text{H}^+] = \sqrt{K_a \times [\text{HA}]}$.

    Worked example. Find the pH of $0.050\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}$ hydrochloric acid (a strong acid).

    It is fully ionised, so $[\text{H}^+] = 0.050\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}$, giving $\text{pH} = -\log(0.050) = 1.30$.

    Worked example. Find the pH of $0.10\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}$ sodium hydroxide (a strong base). ($K_w = 1.0 \times 10^{-14}$.)

    $[\text{OH}^-] = 0.10$, so $[\text{H}^+] = K_w/[\text{OH}^-] = (1.0 \times 10^{-14})/0.10 = 1.0 \times 10^{-13}$, giving $\text{pH} = 13.0$.

    Worked example. Find the pH of $0.10\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}$ ethanoic acid (a weak acid). ($K_a = 1.8 \times 10^{-5}$.)

    $$[\text{H}^+] = \sqrt{K_a \times [\text{HA}]} = \sqrt{(1.8 \times 10^{-5})(0.10)} = 1.3 \times 10^{-3}, \qquad \text{pH} = -\log(1.3 \times 10^{-3}) = 2.87.$$
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    acid dissociation constant 酸解离常数 suān jiě lí cháng shù
    ionic product of water 水的离子积 shuǐ de lí zi jī
    strong acid 强酸 qiáng suān
    strong alkali 强碱 qiáng jiǎn
    weak acid 弱酸 ruò suān
    25.1

    Buffer solutions

    A buffer solution 缓冲溶液 resists a change in pH when a small amount of acid or alkali is added. You make one from a weak acid and its conjugate base (for example ethanoic acid and sodium ethanoate).

    It works because the mixture holds a store of both partners:

    • added $\text{H}^+$ is removed by the conjugate base: $\text{CH}_3\text{COO}^- + \text{H}^+ \rightarrow \text{CH}_3\text{COOH}$.
    • added $\text{OH}^-$ is removed by the weak acid: $\text{CH}_3\text{COOH} + \text{OH}^- \rightarrow \text{CH}_3\text{COO}^- + \text{H}_2\text{O}$.
    A buffer store of HA and A-, with added H+ removed by A- and added OH- removed by HA
    A buffer holds a store of a weak acid and its conjugate base: added H$^+$ is mopped up by A$^-$ and added OH$^-$ by HA, so the pH barely changes

    To find the pH, put the concentrations of the acid and its salt into the $K_a$ expression. Buffers are important in living things — for example, $\text{HCO}_3^-$ keeps the pH of blood close to $7.4$.

    Explore

    Buffers and the titration curve

    Add alkali to acid: the flat part is where a buffer resists pH change, and the steep jump is the equivalence point.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    buffer solution 缓冲溶液 huǎn chōng róng yè
    25.1

    Solubility product

    For a salt that barely dissolves, the solubility product 溶度积 ($K_{\text{sp}}$) is the product of the ion concentrations in a saturated solution, each raised to the power of its number in the formula:

    $$K_{\text{sp}} = [\text{Ag}^+][\text{Cl}^-] \qquad K_{\text{sp}} = [\text{Ca}^{2+}][\text{F}^-]^2$$

    You can find $K_{\text{sp}}$ from the solubility, or the solubility from $K_{\text{sp}}$.

    Stalactites hanging from a cave roof
    Stalactites grow as dissolved calcium carbonate slowly comes back out of solution — a real solubility equilibrium

    The common ion effect

    The common ion effect 同离子效应 is the way a salt becomes less soluble in a solution that already contains one of its ions. The extra ion pushes the dissolving equilibrium back (Le Chatelier), so less salt dissolves. You can calculate the new solubility using $K_{\text{sp}}$ and the concentration of the common ion.

    Explore

    Solubility product lab

    ionic product compared with Ksp

    Increase ion concentration and see when precipitation becomes likely.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    solubility product 溶度积 róng dù jī
    common ion effect 同离子效应 tóng lí zi xiào yìng
    25.2

    Partition coefficients

    Syllabus
    1. state what is meant by the term partition coefficient, $K_{\text{pc}}$
    2. calculate and use a partition coefficient for a system in which the solute is in the same physical state in the two solvents
    3. understand the factors affecting the numerical value of a partition coefficient in terms of the polarities of the solute and the solvents used

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    When a solute is shaken with two solvents that do not mix, it spreads between them. The partition coefficient 分配系数 ($K_{\text{pc}}$) is the ratio of its concentrations in the two layers (at constant temperature):

    $$K_{\text{pc}} = \frac{[\text{solute in solvent 1}]}{[\text{solute in solvent 2}]}$$

    This works when the solute 溶质 is in the same physical state in both solvents. The value depends on the polarity 极性 of the solute and of each solvent 溶剂: a non-polar solute dissolves more in the non-polar solvent, while a polar solute prefers the polar solvent.

    Two immiscible solvent layers with a solute spread between them, more in the non-polar top layer than the water below
    A solute shaken with two immiscible solvents spreads between them; the partition coefficient is the ratio of its concentrations in the two layers
    Explore

    Partition coefficient lab

    Kpc = concentration organic / concentration aqueous

    Change organic-layer concentration and see the partition ratio.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    partition coefficient 分配系数 fēn pèi xì shù
    solute 溶质 róng zhì
    polarity 极性 jí xìng
    solvent 溶剂 róng jì
    25.2

    Exam tips

    • $\text{pH} = -\log[\text{H}^+]$; for a strong acid $[\text{H}^+]$ = concentration, for a weak acid use $[\text{H}^+] = \sqrt{K_a[\text{HA}]}$.
    • For a base, get $[\text{H}^+]$ from $K_w = [\text{H}^+][\text{OH}^-] = 1.0 \times 10^{-14}$.
    • For a buffer use $[\text{H}^+] = K_a \times [\text{acid}]/[\text{salt}]$ and explain how it removes added $\text{H}^+$/$\text{OH}^-$.
    • Write the $K_{sp}$ expression with the correct powers; the number of decimal places in a pH equals the significant figures of $[\text{H}^+]$.
  • 26 Reaction kinetics
    26.1

    Rate equations and orders

    Syllabus
    1. explain and use the terms rate equation, order of reaction, overall order of reaction, rate constant, half-life, rate-determining step and intermediate
    2. (a) understand and use rate equations of the form $\text{rate} = k [\text{A}]^m[\text{B}]^n$ (for which $m$ and $n$ are 0, 1 or 2) (b) deduce the order of a reaction from concentration–time graphs or from experimental data relating to the initial rates method and half-life method (c) interpret experimental data in graphical form, including concentration–time and rate–concentration graphs (d) calculate an initial rate using concentration data (e) construct a rate equation
    3. (a) show understanding that the half-life of a first-order reaction is independent of concentration (b) use the half-life of a first-order reaction in calculations
    4. calculate the numerical value of a rate constant, for example by: (a) using the initial rates and the rate equation (b) using the half-life, $t_{\frac{1}{2}}$, and the equation $k = 0.693/t_{\frac{1}{2}}$
    5. for a multi-step reaction: (a) suggest a reaction mechanism that is consistent with the rate equation and the equation for the overall reaction (b) predict the order that would result from a given reaction mechanism and rate-determining step (c) deduce a rate equation using a given reaction mechanism and rate-determining step for a given reaction (d) identify an intermediate or catalyst from a given reaction mechanism (e) identify the rate determining step from a rate equation and a given reaction mechanism
    6. describe qualitatively the effect of temperature change on the rate constant and hence the rate of a reaction

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A rate equation 速率方程 shows how the rate depends on the concentrations of the reactants:

    $$\text{rate} = k\,[\text{A}]^m[\text{B}]^n$$
    • $m$ is the order of reaction 反应级数 with respect to A, and $n$ the order with respect to B. Each is $0$, $1$ or $2$.
    • the overall order of reaction 总反应级数 is $m + n$.
    • $k$ is the rate constant 速率常数. The rate equation can only be found by experiment, not from the balanced equation.
    A glass gas syringe
    A gas syringe measures the volume of gas made over time, which gives the rate of reaction

    Finding the order

    • initial rates method: change one concentration at a time and see how the starting rate changes. If doubling $[\text{A}]$ doubles the rate, the order in A is 1; if it quadruples the rate, the order is 2; if the rate is unchanged, the order is 0.

    Worked example. In experiments on $\text{A} + \text{B} \rightarrow$ products, doubling $[\text{A}]$ (with $[\text{B}]$ fixed) doubles the rate, and doubling $[\text{B}]$ (with $[\text{A}]$ fixed) quadruples the rate. Write the rate equation and give the overall order.

    Doubling $[\text{A}]$ doubles the rate, so first order in A. Doubling $[\text{B}]$ quadruples ($2^2$) the rate, so second order in B. Hence

    $$\text{rate} = k[\text{A}][\text{B}]^2, \qquad \text{overall order} = 1 + 2 = 3.$$
    • graphs: a concentration–time graph for a first-order reaction has a constant half-life 半衰期 (the time for the concentration to halve). A rate–concentration graph is a straight line through the origin for first order, and a curve for second order.
    Three rate-against-concentration lines: a flat line for zero order, a straight line through the origin for first order, and an upward curve for second order
    Rate against concentration: zero order is a flat line, first order a straight line through the origin, second order an upward curve

    Half-life and the rate constant

    For a first-order reaction the half-life is constant — it does not depend on the concentration. You can find the rate constant from it:

    $$k = \frac{0.693}{t_{\frac{1}{2}}}$$
    A concentration-time decay curve with three equal half-life intervals marked, the concentration halving each time
    A first-order reaction has a constant half-life: the concentration halves in the same time $t_{1/2}$ again and again, whatever the starting value

    Worked example. A first-order reaction has a half-life of $120\ \text{s}$. Find its rate constant.

    $$k = \frac{0.693}{t_{1/2}} = \frac{0.693}{120} = 5.8 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{s}^{-1}.$$

    You can also find $k$ by putting initial-rate data into the rate equation.

    Explore

    Rate equations & orders

    [A] = [A]₀·b

    A first-order reaction decays exponentially — equal half-lives.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    rate equation 速率方程 sù lǜ fāng chéng
    order of reaction 反应级数 fǎn yìng jí shù
    overall order of reaction 总反应级数 zǒng fǎn yìng jí shù
    rate constant 速率常数 sù lǜ cháng shù
    half-life 半衰期 bàn shuāi qī
    26.1

    Reaction mechanisms

    Most reactions happen in several steps. The slowest step is the rate-determining step 决速步骤, and it controls the overall rate. Only the species involved up to and including this step appear in the rate equation.

    A reaction energy profile with two humps: a tall first barrier marked as the slow rate-determining step, a dip for the intermediate, then a smaller second barrier
    A two-step profile: the slower step has the bigger barrier and is rate-determining; the dip between the two barriers is an intermediate
    • an intermediate 中间体 is a species made in one step and then used up in a later step. It is not in the overall equation.
    • you can suggest a mechanism that fits both the rate equation and the overall equation, predict the order from a given mechanism, or pick out the rate-determining step.

    If you compare the initial rate 初始速率 of different mixtures, you can deduce the rate equation, and from that work out the mechanism.

    Effect of temperature

    Raising the temperature increases the rate constant $k$ (more molecules pass the activation energy), so the rate goes up.

    Explore

    Organic mechanism route

    Trace electron-pair movement from reagent to product.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    rate-determining step 决速步骤 jué sù bù zhòu
    intermediate 中间体 zhōng jiān tǐ
    initial rate 初始速率 chū shǐ sù lǜ
    26.2

    Catalysts

    Syllabus
    1. explain that catalysts can be homogeneous or heterogeneous
    2. describe the mode of action of a heterogeneous catalyst to include adsorption of reactants, bond weakening and desorption of products, for example: (a) iron in the Haber process (b) palladium, platinum and rhodium in the catalytic removal of oxides of nitrogen from the exhaust gases of car engines
    3. describe the mode of action of a homogeneous catalyst by being used in one step and reformed in a later step, for example: (a) atmospheric oxides of nitrogen in the oxidation of atmospheric sulfur dioxide (b) $\text{Fe}^{2+}$ or $\text{Fe}^{3+}$ in the $\text{I}^- / \text{S}_2\text{O}_8^{2-}$ reaction

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Catalysts 催化剂 can be homogeneous or heterogeneous.

    Heterogeneous catalysts

    A heterogeneous catalyst 多相催化剂 is in a different physical state from the reactants (usually a solid with gases). It works in three stages:

    1. adsorption 吸附: reactant molecules stick to the catalyst surface.
    2. the bonds in the reactants are weakened, so they react more easily.
    3. desorption 脱附: the product molecules leave the surface.
    Three stages on a catalyst surface: two reactant atoms adsorbing onto it, reacting with weakened bonds, then the product desorbing
    A heterogeneous catalyst works in three stages: the reactants adsorb onto the surface, their weakened bonds let them react, then the product desorbs
    A tray holding many small ceramic catalyst pieces in different shapes: solid cylinders, rings, ribbed rods and discs with holes
    Real heterogeneous catalysts are made as small shaped pellets, rings and perforated discs, which give a large surface area for the reactants to stick to

    Examples are iron in the Haber process, and platinum, palladium and rhodium in a catalytic converter.

    Homogeneous catalysts

    A homogeneous catalyst 均相催化剂 is in the same physical state as the reactants. It is used up in one step and then reformed in a later step, so it comes back unchanged. Examples are oxides of nitrogen helping to oxidise atmospheric sulfur dioxide, and $\text{Fe}^{2+}$ or $\text{Fe}^{3+}$ speeding up the reaction between $\text{I}^-$ and $\text{S}_2\text{O}_8^{2-}$.

    Explore

    How a catalyst speeds a reaction

    Turn the catalyst on and watch the rate jump — it gives more successful collisions per second by offering a lower-energy path.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    catalyst 催化剂 cuī huà jì
    heterogeneous catalyst 多相催化剂 duō xiāng cuī huà jì
    adsorption 吸附 xī fù
    desorption 脱附 tuō fù
    homogeneous catalyst 均相催化剂 jūn xiāng cuī huà jì
    26.2

    Exam tips

    • Find orders from initial-rate data: doubling a concentration that doubles the rate is first order, quadruples it is second order, no change is zero order.
    • Write $\text{rate} = k[\text{A}]^m[\text{B}]^n$ and work out the units of $k$ from it.
    • The rate-determining step contains the species (and orders) in the rate equation — use this to test a mechanism.
    • A constant half-life means first order.
  • 27 Group 2
    27.1

    Thermal stability of the nitrates and carbonates

    Syllabus
    1. describe and explain qualitatively the trend in the thermal stability of the nitrates and carbonates including the effect of ionic radius on the polarisation of the large anion
    2. describe and explain qualitatively the variation in solubility and of enthalpy change of solution, $\Delta H^{\ominus}_{\text{sol}}$, of the hydroxides and sulfates in terms of relative magnitudes of the enthalpy change of hydration and the lattice energy

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The thermal stability 热稳定性 of the Group 2 nitrates 硝酸盐 and carbonates 碳酸盐 increases down the group. Here is the reason, in terms of how the ions affect each other.

    A rotary kiln at a lime works
    Heating limestone (calcium carbonate) in a kiln decomposes it to calcium oxide — a thermal decomposition

    A small cation 阳离子 with a small ionic radius 离子半径 has a high charge density. It pulls on the electrons of the nearby anion and distorts its shape — this is polarisation 极化. Distorting the large anion 阴离子 (the carbonate or nitrate ion) weakens a bond inside it, so the compound breaks down more easily.

    Going down the group, the cation gets larger. Its charge density drops, so it polarises the anion less. The anion is less distorted, so the compound is harder to break down — it is more thermally stable and needs a higher temperature to decompose.

    Two scenarios: a small magnesium cation strongly distorts the carbonate anion's electron cloud into a teardrop shape, while a large barium cation barely distorts it
    A small cation has a high charge density, so it distorts (polarises) the large anion more — weakening it, so the compound is less stable

    Worked example. Down Group 2 the hydroxides become more soluble while the sulfates become less soluble. Explain why the two trends run in opposite directions. Solubility is a contest between the lattice energy holding the solid together and the hydration energy rewarding the ions for dissolving. Both get less exothermic as the cation grows, so whichever falls faster decides the trend. With the small hydroxide ion, the lattice energy depends strongly on the cation's size, so it falls faster than the hydration energy: the lattice gets relatively easier to break and solubility rises. With the large sulfate ion, the lattice energy is already dominated by that big anion and barely changes down the group, while the cation's hydration energy still falls - so solubility falls. Name both energies and say which one falls faster; simply restating the trends earns no explanation marks.

    Explore

    Group 2 thermal stability ladder

    Move down Group 2 and see why carbonates become harder to decompose.

    Explore

    Group 2 solubility lab

    Classify Group 2 compounds by solubility trend.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    thermal stability 热稳定性 rè wěn dìng xìng
    nitrate 硝酸盐 xiāo suān yán
    carbonate 碳酸盐 tàn suān yán
    cation 阳离子 yáng lí zi
    ionic radius 离子半径 lí zi bàn jìng
    polarisation 极化 jí huà
    anion 阴离子 yīn lí zi
    27.1

    Solubility of the hydroxides and sulfates

    When an ionic solid dissolves, two energy changes compete. The enthalpy change of solution 溶解焓变 is the sum of them:

    Down Group 2 the hydroxides get more soluble but the sulfates get less soluble
    Down Group 2 the hydroxides get more soluble but the sulfates less
    $$\Delta H^{\ominus}_{\text{sol}} = -\Delta H_{\text{latt}} + \Delta H_{\text{hyd}}$$
    • you must first pull the lattice apart (this needs the lattice energy 晶格能).
    • then water surrounds the ions (this releases the enthalpy change of hydration 水合焓变).

    If the energy released on hydration roughly matches (or beats) the energy needed to break the lattice, the solid dissolves easily.

    A pale blue gelatinous copper(II) hydroxide precipitate
    An insoluble metal hydroxide forms as a gelatinous precipitate when its lattice energy is too large to be repaid by hydration

    Going down the group, both the lattice energy and the hydration enthalpy get smaller (less negative), because the cation is larger. But they shrink at different rates, and this explains the opposite trends:

    Two boxes contrasting hydroxides and sulfates: for hydroxides the lattice energy falls a lot, for sulfates it stays constant, giving opposite solubility trends
    Why the trends are opposite: the small OH$^-$ lattice energy falls a lot down the group (hydroxides dissolve more), but the large SO$_4^{2-}$ lattice energy barely changes (sulfates dissolve less)
    Compound Trend in solubility 溶解度 down the group Why
    hydroxides 氢氧化物 increases the $\text{OH}^-$ ion is small, so the lattice energy falls a lot down the group; this change outweighs the fall in hydration energy
    sulfates 硫酸盐 decreases the $\text{SO}_4^{2-}$ ion is large, so the lattice energy stays almost the same; the fall in hydration energy then dominates, so dissolving becomes less favourable
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    enthalpy change of solution 溶解焓变 róng jiě hán biàn
    lattice energy 晶格能 jīng gé néng
    enthalpy change of hydration 水合焓变 shuǐ hé hán biàn
    solubility 溶解度 róng jiě dù
    hydroxide 氢氧化物 qīng yǎng huà wù
    sulfate 硫酸盐 liú suān yán
    27.1

    Exam tips

    • Thermal stability of carbonates and nitrates increases down the group — larger cations polarise the anion less.
    • Give the decomposition products: carbonates → oxide + $\text{CO}_2$; nitrates → oxide + $\text{NO}_2$ + $\text{O}_2$ (brown gas).
    • Hydroxides get more soluble and sulfates less soluble down the group.
    • Explain trends with cation charge density (polarising power), not just size.
  • 28 Chemistry of transition elements
    28.1

    Transition elements

    Syllabus
    1. define a transition element as a d-block element which forms one or more stable ions with incomplete d orbitals
    2. sketch the shape of a $3\text{d}_{xy}$ orbital and $3\text{d}_{z^2}$ orbital
    3. understand that transition elements have the following properties: (a) they have variable oxidation states (b) they behave as catalysts (c) they form complex ions (d) they form coloured compounds
    4. explain why transition elements have variable oxidation states in terms of the similarity in energy of the 3d and the 4s sub-shells
    5. explain why transition elements behave as catalysts in terms of having more than one stable oxidation state, and vacant d orbitals that are energetically accessible and can form dative bonds with ligands
    6. explain why transition elements form complex ions in terms of vacant d orbitals that are energetically accessible

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A transition element 过渡元素 is a d-block element that forms one or more stable ions with incomplete d orbitals. (Scandium and zinc are in the d-block but are not transition elements, because their stable ions have empty or full d orbitals.)

    The 3d orbitals 轨道 have set shapes: the $3\text{d}_{xy}$ orbital has four lobes pointing between the axes, and the $3\text{d}_{z^2}$ orbital has two lobes along the $z$-axis with a ring around the middle.

    Four key properties (and why)

    Property Reason
    variable oxidation state 氧化态 the 3d and 4s sub-shells are close in energy, so similar small amounts of energy remove different numbers of electrons
    act as a catalyst 催化剂 they have more than one stable oxidation state, and vacant d orbitals that can form dative bonds
    form complex ions vacant d orbitals can accept lone pairs
    form coloured compounds electrons move between split d orbitals (see below)
    Four properties: variable oxidation states, acting as catalysts, forming complex ions, and coloured compounds
    The four key properties of the transition elements
    A red ruby crystal
    A ruby is red because of transition-metal (chromium) ions held in its crystal lattice
    Explore

    Transition element property lab

    Sort transition-metal evidence by the property it shows.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    transition element 过渡元素 guò dù yuán sù
    orbital 轨道 guǐ dào
    oxidation state 氧化态 yǎng huà tài
    catalyst 催化剂 cuī huà jì
    28.2

    Ligands and complexes

    Syllabus
    1. describe and explain the reactions of transition elements with ligands to form complexes, including the complexes of copper(II) and cobalt(II) ions with water and ammonia molecules and hydroxide and chloride ions
    2. define the term ligand as a species that contains a lone pair of electrons that forms a dative covalent bond to a central metal atom/ion
    3. understand and use the terms: (a) monodentate ligand including as examples $\text{H}_2\text{O}$, $\text{NH}_3$, $\text{Cl}^-$ and $\text{CN}^-$ (b) bidentate ligand including as examples 1,2-diaminoethane, en, $\text{H}_2\text{NCH}_2\text{CH}_2\text{NH}_2$ and the ethanedioate ion, $\text{C}_2\text{O}_4^{2-}$ (c) polydentate ligand including as an example $\text{EDTA}^{4-}$
    4. define the term complex as a molecule or ion formed by a central metal atom/ion surrounded by one or more ligands
    5. describe the geometry (shape and bond angles) of transition element complexes which are linear, square planar, tetrahedral or octahedral
    6. (a) state what is meant by coordination number (b) predict the formula and charge of a complex ion, given the metal ion, its charge or oxidation state, the ligand and its coordination number or geometry
    7. explain qualitatively that ligand exchange can occur, including the complexes of copper(II) ions and cobalt(II) ions with water and ammonia molecules and hydroxide and chloride ions
    8. predict, using $E^\ominus$ values, the feasibility of redox reactions involving transition elements and their ions
    9. describe the reactions of, and perform calculations involving: (a) $\text{MnO}_4^- / \text{C}_2\text{O}_4^{2-}$ in acid solution given suitable data (b) $\text{MnO}_4^- / \text{Fe}^{2+}$ in acid solution given suitable data (c) $\text{Cu}^{2+} / \text{I}^-$ given suitable data
    10. perform calculations involving other redox systems given suitable data

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A transition metal ion can be surrounded by complex ions 配离子. The species attached are ligands.

    A ligand 配体 is a species with a lone pair of electrons that forms a dative covalent bond 配位键 to the central metal ion. (The lone pair 孤对电子 is what it donates.) Ligands are grouped by how many such bonds they can form:

    • monodentate 单齿: one bond ($\text{H}_2\text{O}$, $\text{NH}_3$, $\text{Cl}^-$, $\text{CN}^-$).
    • bidentate 双齿: two bonds (1,2-diaminoethane "en", and the ethanedioate ion $\text{C}_2\text{O}_4^{2-}$).
    • polydentate 多齿: many bonds ($\text{EDTA}^{4-}$, which uses six).
    A metal ion with a monodentate ligand making one bond, a bidentate ligand making two bonds, and a polydentate ligand making six
    Ligands are grouped by how many dative bonds they form: monodentate (one), bidentate (two) or polydentate (many, like EDTA's six)

    A complex 配合物 is a central metal atom or ion surrounded by one or more ligands. Its shape can be linear 直线形, square planar 平面正方形, tetrahedral 四面体形 or octahedral 八面体形.

    The coordination number 配位数 is the number of dative bonds from the ligands to the central ion (6 → octahedral, 4 → tetrahedral or square planar, 2 → linear). To predict the charge of a complex, add the metal's charge and all the ligand charges.

    Four complexes: a linear two-ligand, a tetrahedral and a square planar four-ligand, and an octahedral six-ligand, each labelled with its coordination number
    Complex shapes follow the coordination number: 2 is linear, 4 is tetrahedral or square planar, 6 is octahedral

    Ligand exchange

    In ligand exchange 配体交换 one ligand replaces another, often with a colour change. For copper(II):

    $$[\text{Cu}(\text{H}_2\text{O})_6]^{2+} \;(\text{pale blue}) \;\xrightarrow{\text{NH}_3}\; [\text{Cu}(\text{NH}_3)_4(\text{H}_2\text{O})_2]^{2+} \;(\text{deep blue})$$

    With concentrated $\text{HCl}$ it becomes yellow $[\text{CuCl}_4]^{2-}$; cobalt(II) behaves in a similar way.

    Three coloured boxes for copper(II): pale blue with water, deep blue after adding ammonia, yellow after adding concentrated HCl
    Ligand exchange changes the colour of copper(II): pale blue with water, deep blue with ammonia, yellow with concentrated HCl

    Redox reactions of transition ions

    Use $E^{\ominus}$ values to predict whether a redox reaction is feasible. Common titrations you should be able to calculate include $\text{MnO}_4^-/\text{C}_2\text{O}_4^{2-}$ and $\text{MnO}_4^-/\text{Fe}^{2+}$ in acid (purple to colourless), and $\text{Cu}^{2+}/\text{I}^-$ (which makes iodine, then titrated with thiosulfate).

    Worked example. In acid, $\text{MnO}_4^-$ reacts with $\text{Fe}^{2+}$ in the ratio $1:5$ (see the balanced equation above). A $25.0\ \text{cm}^3$ sample of $\text{Fe}^{2+}$ solution needs $22.0\ \text{cm}^3$ of $0.0200\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}$ $\text{KMnO}_4$ to reach the end point. Find the concentration of the $\text{Fe}^{2+}$.

    Moles of $\text{MnO}_4^-$ used $= 0.0200 \times \dfrac{22.0}{1000} = 4.40 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{mol}$. Each mole of $\text{MnO}_4^-$ reacts with $5$ moles of $\text{Fe}^{2+}$, so moles of $\text{Fe}^{2+} = 5 \times 4.40 \times 10^{-4} = 2.20 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{mol}$. This was in $25.0\ \text{cm}^3$, so

    $$[\text{Fe}^{2+}] = \frac{2.20 \times 10^{-3}}{25.0/1000} = 0.0880\ \text{mol dm}^{-3}.$$
    Explore

    Ligand and complex lab

    Identify the part of a complex ion that controls its structure.

    Explore

    Ligand exchange route

    Follow one ligand replacing another around a metal ion.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    complex ion 配离子 pèi lí zi
    ligand 配体 pèi tǐ
    dative covalent bond 配位键 pèi wèi jiàn
    lone pair 孤对电子 gū duì diàn zi
    monodentate 单齿 dān chǐ
    bidentate 双齿 shuāng chǐ
    polydentate 多齿 duō chǐ
    complex 配合物 pèi hé wù
    linear 直线形 zhí xiàn xíng
    square planar 平面正方形 píng miàn zhèng fāng xíng
    tetrahedral 四面体形 sì miàn tǐ xíng
    octahedral 八面体形 bā miàn tǐ xíng
    coordination number 配位数 pèi wèi shù
    ligand exchange 配体交换 pèi tǐ jiāo huàn
    28.3

    Why complexes are coloured

    Syllabus
    1. define and use the terms degenerate and non-degenerate d orbitals
    2. describe the splitting of degenerate d orbitals into two non-degenerate sets of d orbitals of higher energy, and use of $\Delta E$ in: (a) octahedral complexes, two higher and three lower d orbitals (b) tetrahedral complexes, three higher and two lower d orbitals
    3. explain why transition elements form coloured compounds in terms of the frequency of light absorbed as an electron is promoted between two non-degenerate d orbitals
    4. describe, in qualitative terms, the effects of different ligands on $\Delta E$, frequency of light absorbed, and hence the complementary colour that is observed
    5. use the complexes of copper(II) ions and cobalt(II) ions with water and ammonia molecules and hydroxide and chloride ions as examples of ligand exchange affecting the colour observed

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    In a free ion the five d orbitals are degenerate 简并 — they have the same energy. When ligands come close, they split the d orbitals into two non-degenerate 非简并 sets, separated by an energy gap $\Delta E$:

    • octahedral: three lower and two higher orbitals.
    • tetrahedral: two lower and three higher orbitals.

    A complex absorbs light whose frequency matches $\Delta E$, promoting an electron from a lower to a higher d orbital. The colour you see is the complementary colour 互补色 of the light absorbed. Different ligands give a different $\Delta E$, so they change the frequency absorbed and hence the colour — which is why ligand exchange changes the colour.

    The five equal d orbitals of a free ion splitting into a lower and a higher set, separated by an energy gap, for octahedral and tetrahedral complexes
    Ligands split the five d orbitals into two sets separated by a gap $\Delta E$; the complex absorbs light of that energy, so we see the complementary colour
    Six beakers of transition-metal solutions in a row, each a strong different colour: red, orange, yellow, green, blue and violet
    Different metals and oxidation states give different colours: cobalt(II) (red), dichromate (orange), chromate (yellow), nickel(II) (green), copper(II) (blue) and permanganate (violet)
    Explore

    Complex colour route

    Follow light absorption from d-orbital splitting to observed colour.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    degenerate 简并 jiǎn bìng
    non-degenerate 非简并 fēi jiǎn bìng
    complementary colour 互补色 hù bǔ sè
    28.4

    Stereoisomerism in complexes

    Syllabus
    1. describe the types of stereoisomerism shown by complexes, including those associated with bidentate ligands: (a) geometrical (cis/trans) isomerism, e.g. square planar such as $[\text{Pt}(\text{NH}_3)_2\text{Cl}_2]$ and octahedral such as $[\text{Co}(\text{NH}_3)_4(\text{H}_2\text{O})_2]^{2+}$ and $[\text{Ni}(\text{H}_2\text{NCH}_2\text{CH}_2\text{NH}_2)_2(\text{H}_2\text{O})_2]^{2+}$ (b) optical isomerism, e.g. $[\text{Ni}(\text{H}_2\text{NCH}_2\text{CH}_2\text{NH}_2)_3]^{2+}$ and $[\text{Ni}(\text{H}_2\text{NCH}_2\text{CH}_2\text{NH}_2)_2(\text{H}_2\text{O})_2]^{2+}$
    2. deduce the overall polarity of complexes such as those described in 28.4.1(a) and 28.4.1(b)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    • geometrical isomerism 几何异构 (cis 顺式 / trans 反式) appears in square planar complexes such as $[\text{Pt}(\text{NH}_3)_2\text{Cl}_2]$, and in octahedral complexes such as $[\text{Co}(\text{NH}_3)_4(\text{H}_2\text{O})_2]^{2+}$.
    A square planar platinum complex drawn twice: cis with the two ammonia ligands adjacent, trans with them opposite
    Geometrical isomerism in a square planar complex: the two identical ligands are adjacent (cis) or opposite (trans)
    • optical isomerism 旋光异构 appears in octahedral complexes with bidentate ligands, such as $[\text{Ni}(\text{en})_3]^{2+}$, which has two non-superimposable mirror images.

    You can also deduce the polarity of a complex: a cis form may be polar, while the matching trans form is often non-polar because its dipoles cancel.

    Explore

    Complex stereoisomer lab

    Classify complex isomers by ligand arrangement.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    geometrical isomerism 几何异构 jǐ hé yì gòu
    cis 顺式 shùn shì
    trans 反式 fǎn shì
    optical isomerism 旋光异构 xuán guāng yì gòu
    28.5

    Stability constants

    Syllabus
    1. define the stability constant, $K_{\text{stab}}$, of a complex as the equilibrium constant for the formation of the complex ion in a solvent (from its constituent ions or molecules)
    2. write an expression for a $K_{\text{stab}}$ of a complex ($[\text{H}_2\text{O}]$ should not be included)
    3. use $K_{\text{stab}}$ expressions to perform calculations
    4. describe and explain ligand exchanges in terms of $K_{\text{stab}}$ values and understand that a large $K_{\text{stab}}$ is due to the formation of a stable complex ion

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The stability constant 稳定常数 ($K_{\text{stab}}$) is the equilibrium constant for forming a complex ion from the metal ion and its ligands in solution (water is left out of the expression).

    A large $K_{\text{stab}}$ means a very stable complex. In a ligand exchange, the position moves towards the complex with the larger $K_{\text{stab}}$ — that is why a ligand that forms a more stable complex can push out a weaker one.

    Explore

    Stability constant lab

    larger Kstab favours complex

    Increase ligand binding strength and see complex formation become more complete.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    stability constant 稳定常数 wěn dìng cháng shù
    28.5

    Exam tips

    • Define a transition element: it forms at least one ion with a partially filled d sub-shell — so Sc and Zn are excluded.
    • Colour comes from d-d transitions (ligands split the d orbitals); the colour seen is the complement of the light absorbed.
    • State the ligand and coordination number and predict the shape (6 = octahedral, 4 = tetrahedral or square planar).
    • Ligand exchange can change colour and coordination number; a larger stability constant = a more stable complex.
  • 29 An introduction to A Level organic chemistry
    29.1

    New functional groups and naming

    Syllabus
    1. understand that the compounds in the table on page 47 contain a functional group which dictates their physical and chemical properties
    2. interpret and use the general, structural, displayed and skeletal formulas of the classes of compound stated in the table on page 47
    3. understand and use systematic nomenclature of simple aliphatic organic molecules (including cyclic compounds containing a single ring of up to six carbon atoms) with functional groups detailed in the table on page 47, up to six carbon atoms (six plus six for esters and amides, straight chains only for esters and nitriles)
    4. understand and use systematic nomenclature of simple aromatic molecules with one benzene ring and one or more simple substituents, for example 3-nitrobenzoic acid or 2,4,6-tribromophenol

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    At A Level you meet more functional group 官能团 families, including the amide 酰胺 group and aromatic 芳香 compounds (those built on a benzene ring). As before, the functional group decides the properties, and you read it from the general, structural, displayed or skeletal formula.

    Naming aromatic compounds

    A benzene molecule is a ring of six carbons. When you name an aromatic compound, use the benzene ring 苯环 as the parent and number the positions of the substituents. For example, 3-nitrobenzoic acid has a $\text{–NO}_2$ group on carbon 3, and 2,4,6-tribromophenol has three bromine atoms on a phenol ring. You can also name cyclic compounds with a single ring of up to six carbons.

    Two numbered benzene rings: 3-nitrobenzoic acid with COOH at position 1 and a nitro group at position 3, and 2,4,6-tribromophenol with OH at position 1 and bromine at positions 2, 4 and 6
    Number the ring from the principal group (carbon 1); the substituent positions then give the name
    Explore

    Aromatic naming lab

    Classify aromatic substituents by how they are named.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    functional group 官能团 guān néng tuán
    amide 酰胺 xiān àn
    aromatic 芳香 fāng xiāng
    benzene běn
    benzene ring 苯环 běn huán
    29.2

    Two new types of mechanism

    Syllabus
    1. understand and use the following terminology associated with types of organic mechanisms: (a) electrophilic substitution (b) addition–elimination

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    • electrophilic substitution 亲电取代: an electrophile replaces a hydrogen atom on a benzene ring (this is how benzene reacts).
    • addition–elimination 加成消去: a molecule first adds on, then a small molecule is removed (seen with 2,4-DNPH and with acyl chlorides).
    Electrophilic substitution and addition-elimination
    Two aromatic mechanisms: electrophilic substitution and addition-elimination
    Explore

    Electrophilic substitution on benzene

    Step through how benzene reacts. An electrophile swaps for a hydrogen — keeping the stable ring — instead of adding across it.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electrophilic substitution 亲电取代 qīn diàn qǔ dài
    addition–elimination 加成消去 jiā chéng xiāo qù
    29.3

    The shape of benzene

    Syllabus
    1. describe and explain the shape of benzene and other aromatic molecules, including $\text{sp}^2$ hybridisation, in terms of $\sigma$ bonds and a delocalised $\pi$ system

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Benzene is a flat, regular hexagon. Each carbon is sp² hybridised, using its three hybridisation 杂化 orbitals to make sigma bonds σ to two neighbouring carbons and one hydrogen. This gives the ring of σ bonds.

    Each carbon also has one electron left in a p orbital, standing up at right angles to the ring. These p orbitals overlap sideways all the way round, making a single delocalised 离域 pi bond π system — a ring of electrons above and below the plane. Because the electrons are shared evenly, all six C–C bonds are the same length, and benzene is very stable.

    A benzene hexagon with a p orbital standing up at each carbon, overlapping into a shaded delocalised cloud above and below the ring
    Benzene's bonding: an sp$^2$ $\sigma$ framework makes the flat hexagon, while the p orbitals overlap into one delocalised $\pi$ system above and below the ring

    How do we know benzene really is delocalised? One strong piece of evidence is its enthalpy change of hydrogenation 氢化焓变. Adding hydrogen to one C=C double bond (as in cyclohexene) releases about $120\ \text{kJ}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$, so a Kekulé ring of three separate double bonds should release about $3 \times 120 = 360\ \text{kJ}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$. Real benzene releases only $208\ \text{kJ}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$ — it is about $152\ \text{kJ}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$ more stable than the model predicts.

    An energy-level diagram: hydrogenating the Kekulé model would release 360 kJ/mol but real benzene releases only 208, so real benzene lies about 152 kJ/mol lower in energy than the model
    Evidence for delocalisation: real benzene releases far less on hydrogenation ($-208\ \text{kJ}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$) than the Kekulé model predicts ($-360 = 3\times$ cyclohexene), so it is about $152\ \text{kJ}\,\text{mol}^{-1}$ more stable than expected
    Explore

    Benzene bonding lab

    Follow the evidence for a planar delocalised benzene ring.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    hybridisation 杂化 zá huà
    sigma bond σ键 σ jiàn
    delocalised 离域 lí yù
    pi bond π键 π jiàn
    enthalpy change of hydrogenation 氢化焓变 qīng huà hán biàn
    29.4

    Optical isomerism

    Syllabus
    1. understand that enantiomers have identical physical and chemical properties apart from their ability to rotate plane polarised light and their potential biological activity
    2. understand and use the terms optically active and racemic mixture
    3. describe the effect on plane polarised light of the two optical isomers of a single substance
    4. explain the relevance of chirality to the synthetic preparation of drug molecules including: (a) the potential different biological activity of the two enantiomers (b) the need to separate a racemic mixture into two pure enantiomers (c) the use of chiral catalysts to produce a single pure optical isomer (Candidates should appreciate that compounds can contain more than one chiral centre, but knowledge of meso compounds and nomenclature such as diastereoisomers is not required.)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Two enantiomers 对映体 (mirror-image isomers) have identical physical and chemical properties, with two exceptions:

    • they rotate plane polarised light 平面偏振光 in opposite directions. A substance that does this is optically active 旋光活性.
    • they may have different effects in living things (biological activity).

    A racemic mixture 外消旋混合物 is a 50:50 mix of the two enantiomers. It does not rotate plane polarised light, because the two opposite rotations cancel out.

    Plane-polarised light passing through each enantiomer: one rotates the plane clockwise, the mirror-image enantiomer rotates it anticlockwise
    The two enantiomers rotate plane-polarised light in opposite directions; a 50:50 racemic mixture gives no net rotation

    Why chirality matters for drugs

    Chirality 手性 is important when making medicines. A molecule with a chiral centre 手性中心 has two enantiomers, and they can behave very differently in the body — one may cure while the other does harm. So drug makers either:

    • separate a racemic mixture into the two pure enantiomers, or
    • use a chiral catalyst 手性催化剂 to make just the single enantiomer they want.

    Worked example. Which of butan-1-ol, butan-2-ol and 2-methylpropan-2-ol is chiral? A molecule is chiral if it has a carbon carrying four different groups. Take the carbons one at a time. In butan-2-ol, $\text{CH}_3\text{CH(OH)CH}_2\text{CH}_3$, carbon 2 carries $\text{OH}$, $\text{H}$, $\text{CH}_3$ and $\text{C}_2\text{H}_5$ - four different groups, so it is a chiral centre and butan-2-ol exists as two optical isomers. Butan-1-ol's carbon 1 carries two hydrogens, and the central carbon of 2-methylpropan-2-ol carries two identical methyl groups, so neither is chiral. It takes only one repeated group on a carbon to destroy the chirality there - and compare groups properly: $\text{CH}_3$ and $\text{C}_2\text{H}_5$ differ, but only once you look past the first atom.

    Explore

    Optical isomerism lab

    Identify when a molecule can have non-superimposable mirror images.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    enantiomers 对映体 duì yìng tǐ
    plane polarised light 平面偏振光 píng miàn piān zhèn guāng
    optically active 旋光活性 xuán guāng huó xìng
    racemic mixture 外消旋混合物 wài xiāo xuán hùn hé wù
    chirality 手性 shǒu xìng
    chiral centre 手性中心 shǒu xìng zhōng xīn
    chiral catalyst 手性催化剂 shǒu xìng cuī huà jì
    29.4

    Exam tips

    • Optical isomers need a chiral carbon (four different groups); they are non-superimposable mirror images that rotate plane-polarised light oppositely.
    • A racemic mixture forms when a planar intermediate (carbocation or $\text{C}=\text{O}$) is attacked equally from both sides.
    • Benzene's delocalised ring (equal bond lengths, planar) explains its stability versus the Kekulé model.
    • Learn the two new mechanisms — electrophilic substitution of arenes, and nucleophilic addition-elimination.
  • 30 Hydrocarbons
    30.1

    Arenes

    Syllabus
    1. describe the chemistry of arenes as exemplified by the following reactions of benzene and methylbenzene: (a) substitution reactions with $\text{Cl}_2$ and with $\text{Br}_2$ in the presence of a catalyst, $\text{AlCl}_3$ or $\text{AlBr}_3$, to form halogenoarenes (aryl halides) (b) nitration with a mixture of concentrated $\text{HNO}_3$ and concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ at a temperature between $25\text{ }^{\circ}\text{C}$ and $60\text{ }^{\circ}\text{C}$ (c) Friedel–Crafts alkylation by $\text{CH}_3\text{Cl}$ and $\text{AlCl}_3$ and heat (d) Friedel–Crafts acylation by $\text{CH}_3\text{COCl}$ and $\text{AlCl}_3$ and heat (e) complete oxidation of the side-chain using hot alkaline $\text{KMnO}_4$ and then dilute acid to give a benzoic acid (f) hydrogenation of the benzene ring using $\text{H}_2$ and $\text{Pt/Ni}$ catalyst and heat to form a cyclohexane ring
    2. describe the mechanism of electrophilic substitution in arenes: (a) as exemplified by the formation of nitrobenzene and bromobenzene (b) with regards to the effect of delocalisation (aromatic stabilisation) of electrons in arenes to explain the predomination of substitution over addition
    3. predict whether halogenation will occur in the side-chain or in the aromatic ring in arenes depending on reaction conditions
    4. describe that in the electrophilic substitution of arenes, different substituents direct to different ring positions (limited to the directing effects of $-\text{NH}_2$, $-\text{OH}$, $-\text{R}$, $-\text{NO}_2$, $-\text{COOH}$ and $-\text{COR}$)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Arenes 芳烃 are aromatic hydrocarbons, built on the benzene ring. The delocalised ring of electrons is stable and electron-rich, so benzene mostly reacts by electrophilic substitution 亲电取代 — keeping the ring — rather than by addition.

    A pile of white mothballs
    Naphthalene, used in mothballs, is a simple arene — two benzene rings fused together

    Reactions of benzene and methylbenzene

    Reaction Reagents and conditions Product
    halogenation $\text{Cl}_2$ or $\text{Br}_2$, with $\text{AlCl}_3$ or $\text{AlBr}_3$ as a catalyst 催化剂 a halogenoarene 卤代芳烃 (aryl halide)
    nitration 硝化 concentrated $\text{HNO}_3$ + concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$, $25$$60\,°\text{C}$ nitrobenzene
    Friedel–Crafts alkylation 傅克烷基化 $\text{CH}_3\text{Cl}$ + $\text{AlCl}_3$, heat methylbenzene (adds an alkyl group)
    Friedel–Crafts acylation 傅克酰基化 $\text{CH}_3\text{COCl}$ + $\text{AlCl}_3$, heat a phenyl ketone (adds an acyl group)
    side-chain oxidation hot alkaline $\text{KMnO}_4$, then dilute acid benzoic acid 苯甲酸
    hydrogenation 氢化 $\text{H}_2$, $\text{Pt/Ni}$ catalyst, heat cyclohexane
    Friedel-Crafts alkylation adds an alkyl group; acylation adds an acyl group
    Friedel-Crafts: alkylation adds an alkyl group, acylation an acyl group
    Benzene at the centre with arrows to chlorobenzene, nitrobenzene, methylbenzene, a phenyl ketone and cyclohexane, each labelled with its reagents
    Benzene keeps its stable ring, reacting mostly by electrophilic substitution (and by addition only with hydrogen)

    In the side-chain oxidation, the whole side-chain 侧链 (such as the $\text{–CH}_3$ on methylbenzene) is turned into a $\text{–COOH}$ group, giving benzoic acid. In the hydrogenation, three molecules of $\text{H}_2$ add to the benzene ring 苯环 to make a saturated cyclohexane ring.

    The mechanism: electrophilic substitution

    Take nitration as the example. The acid mix makes the electrophile $\text{NO}_2^+$. Then:

    1. the delocalised electrons of the ring form a bond to the electrophile, giving an unstable intermediate.
    2. an $\text{H}^+$ is lost from that carbon, which restores the stable ring.

    Substitution wins over addition because the delocalisation 离域 (aromatic stabilisation) of the ring is kept. Addition would destroy this stable system, so it is not favoured.

    The nitration mechanism: the ring attacks NO2+ with a curly arrow to give a positive intermediate, which loses H+ to restore the ring as nitrobenzene
    Electrophilic substitution (nitration): the ring attacks the electrophile NO$_2^+$ to give an unstable intermediate, then loses H$^+$ to restore the ring

    Side-chain or ring?

    Where a halogen reacts depends on the conditions:

    • with a halogen-carrier catalyst (such as $\text{AlCl}_3$) and no UV light → substitution in the ring.
    • with UV light and no catalyst → free-radical substitution in the side-chain.
    Methylbenzene with chlorine branching two ways: with AlCl3 and no UV the chlorine substitutes the ring, with UV and no catalyst it substitutes the side-chain methyl group
    The conditions decide: a halogen carrier (AlCl₃) substitutes the ring; UV light substitutes the side-chain

    Directing effects

    A group already on the ring decides where the next group goes — its directing effect 定位效应:

    Two numbered benzene rings: one with positions 2 and 4 highlighted for amino, hydroxyl and alkyl groups, the other with position 3 highlighted for nitro, carboxyl and acyl groups
    A group already on the ring directs the next one: –NH$_2$/–OH/–R send it to positions 2 and 4; –NO$_2$/–COOH/–COR send it to position 3
    Group already present Directs the new group to
    $\text{–NH}_2$, $\text{–OH}$, $\text{–R}$ positions 2 and 4
    $\text{–NO}_2$, $\text{–COOH}$, $\text{–COR}$ position 3

    Worked example. Methylbenzene and nitrobenzene are each nitrated. Predict where the new $\text{NO}_2$ group goes, and which compound reacts faster. Look at the group already on the ring. In methylbenzene the $\text{–CH}_3$ is an alkyl group: it directs the new group to positions 2 and 4, and it releases electrons into the ring, making the ring more attractive to an electrophile - so methylbenzene nitrates faster than benzene. In nitrobenzene the $\text{–NO}_2$ directs to position 3, and it withdraws electrons from the ring - so nitrobenzene nitrates more slowly than benzene. The group already present controls both the position and the rate, and the two always travel together: 2,4-directors activate the ring, 3-directors deactivate it.

    Explore

    Arene substitution route

    Follow electrophilic substitution on benzene.

    Explore

    Directing effects lab

    Classify substituents by how they affect the benzene ring.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    arene 芳烃 fāng tīng
    benzene běn
    electrophilic substitution 亲电取代 qīn diàn qǔ dài
    catalyst 催化剂 cuī huà jì
    halogenoarene 卤代芳烃 lǔ dài fāng tīng
    nitration 硝化 xiāo huà
    Friedel–Crafts alkylation 傅克烷基化 fù kè wán jī huà
    Friedel–Crafts acylation 傅克酰基化 fù kè xiān jī huà
    benzoic acid 苯甲酸 běn jiǎ suān
    hydrogenation 氢化 qīng huà
    side-chain 侧链 cè liàn
    benzene ring 苯环 běn huán
    delocalisation 离域 lí yù
    directing effect 定位效应 dìng wèi xiào yìng
    30.1

    Exam tips

    • Benzene undergoes electrophilic substitution, not addition, because addition would destroy the stable delocalised ring.
    • Learn nitration (concentrated $\text{HNO}_3$/$\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$, $50-60\ ^\circ\text{C}$) and halogenation (halogen + $\text{AlCl}_3$) with the electrophile-generating step.
    • Compare reactivity: benzene resists addition far more than an alkene because of delocalisation.
  • 31 Halogen compounds
    31.1

    Making halogenoarenes

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions by which halogenoarenes can be produced: substitution of an arene with $\text{Cl}_2$ or $\text{Br}_2$ in the presence of a catalyst, $\text{AlCl}_3$ or $\text{AlBr}_3$ to form a halogenoarene, exemplified by benzene to form chlorobenzene and methylbenzene to form 2-chloromethylbenzene and 4-chloromethylbenzene
    2. explain the difference in reactivity between a halogenoalkane and a halogenoarene as exemplified by chloroethane and chlorobenzene

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A halogenoarene 卤代芳烃 (also called an aryl halide) is formed when an arene 芳烃 reacts with $\text{Cl}_2$ or $\text{Br}_2$, using $\text{AlCl}_3$ or $\text{AlBr}_3$ as a catalyst 催化剂. This is the electrophilic substitution from the arenes topic — the halogen replaces a hydrogen on the ring.

    • benzene gives chlorobenzene.
    • methylbenzene gives 1-chloro-2-methylbenzene and 1-chloro-4-methylbenzene (the methyl group directs the chlorine to positions 2 and 4).
    Benzene reacting with chlorine, using aluminium chloride as a catalyst, to give chlorobenzene and hydrogen chloride — a chlorine replaces a hydrogen on the ring
    Making a halogenoarene by electrophilic substitution: with an AlCl₃ catalyst, a chlorine replaces a hydrogen on the ring (giving HCl)
    A tractor spraying a crop in a field
    Many pesticides and herbicides are halogenoarenes — chlorine atoms bonded to a benzene ring
    Explore

    Halogenoarene lab

    Compare halogenoarenes with halogenoalkanes.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    halogenoarene 卤代芳烃 lǔ dài fāng tīng
    arene 芳烃 fāng tīng
    catalyst 催化剂 cuī huà jì
    31.1

    Why a halogenoarene is less reactive than a halogenoalkane

    Compare chloroethane (a halogenoalkane 卤代烷) with chlorobenzene (a halogenoarene).

    A halogenoalkane reacts easily by nucleophilic substitution 亲核取代: its C–Cl bond is polar, so a nucleophile can attack the slightly positive carbon and push the halogen out.

    A halogenoarene is very unreactive towards nucleophilic substitution. There are two reasons:

    • a lone pair 孤对电子 on the chlorine overlaps sideways with the delocalised 离域 ring of electrons. This gives the C–Cl bond partial double-bond character, making it shorter and stronger, so it is much harder to break.
    • the electron-rich ring repels an approaching nucleophile 亲核试剂.

    So chlorobenzene does not react with nucleophiles such as $\text{OH}^-$ under normal conditions, while chloroethane does.

    Chloroethane with a nucleophile attacking its slightly positive carbon, beside chlorobenzene where the chlorine lone pair overlaps the ring and the ring repels the nucleophile
    Chloroethane reacts (a nucleophile attacks the $\delta+$ carbon), but chlorobenzene does not: the Cl lone pair strengthens the C–Cl bond and the ring repels nucleophiles
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    halogenoalkane 卤代烷 lǔ dài wán
    nucleophilic substitution 亲核取代 qīn hé qǔ dài
    lone pair 孤对电子 gū duì diàn zi
    delocalised 离域 lí yù
    nucleophile 亲核试剂 qīn hé shì jì
    31.1

    Exam tips

    • A halogenoarene is less reactive than a halogenoalkane: the lone pair delocalises into the ring, giving the $\text{C-X}$ bond partial double-bond character.
    • Distinguish a halogen on the ring (needs a catalyst, unreactive to substitution) from one on a side chain (reacts like a halogenoalkane).
  • 32 Hydroxy compounds
    32.1

    Alcohols with acyl chlorides

    Syllabus
    1. describe the reaction with acyl chlorides to form esters using ethyl ethanoate

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    At A Level you meet one more reaction of an alcohol: it reacts with an acyl chloride 酰氯 to make an ester. This works faster and more completely than using a carboxylic acid. For example, ethanol and ethanoyl chloride give ethyl ethanoate, plus fumes of $\text{HCl}$.

    Ethanol reacting with ethanoyl chloride to give the ester ethyl ethanoate and hydrogen chloride
    An acyl chloride reacts with an alcohol faster and more completely than a carboxylic acid does, giving the ester and HCl fumes
    Explore

    Acyl chloride with alcohol route

    Follow nucleophilic acyl substitution to an ester.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    alcohol chún
    acyl chloride 酰氯 xiān lǜ
    ester zhǐ
    32.2

    Phenol

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions (reagents and conditions) by which phenol can be produced: (a) reaction of phenylamine with $\text{HNO}_2$ or $\text{NaNO}_2$ and dilute acid below $10\text{ }^\circ\text{C}$ to produce the diazonium salt; further warming of the diazonium salt with $\text{H}_2\text{O}$ to give phenol
    2. recall the chemistry of phenol, as exemplified by the following reactions: (a) with bases, for example $\text{NaOH(aq)}$ to produce sodium phenoxide (b) with $\text{Na(s)}$ to produce sodium phenoxide and $\text{H}_2\text{(g)}$ (c) in $\text{NaOH(aq)}$ with diazonium salts, to give azo compounds (d) nitration of the aromatic ring with dilute $\text{HNO}_3\text{(aq)}$ at room temperature to give a mixture of 2-nitrophenol and 4-nitrophenol (e) bromination of the aromatic ring with $\text{Br}_2\text{(aq)}$ to form 2,4,6-tribromophenol
    3. explain the acidity of phenol
    4. describe and explain the relative acidities of water, phenol and ethanol
    5. explain why the reagents and conditions for the nitration and bromination of phenol are different from those for benzene
    6. recall that the hydroxyl group of a phenol directs to the 2-, 4- and 6-positions
    7. apply knowledge of the reactions of phenol to those of other phenolic compounds, e.g. naphthol

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Phenol 苯酚 has an $\text{–OH}$ group joined directly to a benzene ring. This changes the chemistry of both the $\text{–OH}$ group and the ring.

    A sample of phenol that has turned pink
    Phenol is a low-melting solid; it slowly turns pink as it oxidises in air

    Making phenol

    Cool phenylamine 苯胺 with $\text{NaNO}_2$ and dilute acid below $10\,°\text{C}$ to make a diazonium salt 重氮盐. Warming this salt with water then gives phenol (and nitrogen gas).

    Reactions of phenol

    • with a base such as $\text{NaOH(aq)}$: phenol reacts to give sodium phenoxide and water. (Ordinary alcohols do not react with $\text{NaOH}$ — this shows phenol is more acidic.)
    • with sodium metal: gives sodium phenoxide and hydrogen.
    • with a diazonium salt in $\text{NaOH(aq)}$: forms a coloured azo compound 偶氮化合物 (used in dyes).
    • nitration 硝化 with dilute $\text{HNO}_3$ at room temperature: gives a mixture of 2-nitrophenol and 4-nitrophenol.
    • bromination 溴化 with bromine water at room temperature (no catalyst): gives a white precipitate of 2,4,6-tribromophenol.

    Acidity of phenol

    Phenol loses its $\text{H}^+$ to form a phenoxide ion. This ion is stabilised because its negative charge is spread (delocalised) into the ring. So phenol's acidity 酸性 is higher than that of water or ethanol:

    $$\text{ethanol} < \text{water} < \text{phenol}$$
    Phenol losing a proton to a phenoxide ion, with a curly arrow showing the negative charge spreading into the ring
    Phenol is more acidic than water or an alcohol: losing H$^+$ gives a phenoxide ion whose negative charge spreads into the ring, stabilising it

    (Phenol is still a weak acid — weaker than a carboxylic acid.)

    Why the conditions are milder than for benzene

    A lone pair on the phenol oxygen is partly delocalised 离域 into the ring. This makes the ring more electron-rich, so it attracts electrophiles more strongly. Phenol therefore reacts faster and under much milder conditions than benzene — no catalyst is needed, and dilute reagents work at room temperature.

    Phenol reacting with bromine water at room temperature to give 2,4,6-tribromophenol, a white precipitate
    Phenol's ring is activated, so bromine water brominates positions 2, 4 and 6 at room temperature with no catalyst, giving a white precipitate

    The $\text{–OH}$ group directs new substituents to the 2-, 4- and 6-positions. The same ideas apply to other phenolic compounds, such as naphthol.

    A pink bar of carbolic soap
    Carbolic soap contains phenol, which was one of the first antiseptics

    Worked example. Phenol, ethanol and ethanoic acid are each shaken with aqueous $\text{NaOH}$ and then with aqueous $\text{Na}_2\text{CO}_3$. Predict what happens, and order the three by acidity. Acidity depends on how well the anion left behind is stabilised. Ethanol's ethoxide keeps its charge stuck on one oxygen, so ethanol is weakest and reacts with neither. Phenol's phenoxide spreads the charge into the ring, making phenol acidic enough to react with the strong base $\text{NaOH}$ but not with the weaker $\text{Na}_2\text{CO}_3$ - so no fizzing. Ethanoate spreads the charge over two oxygens, the most effective of the three, so ethanoic acid reacts with both and fizzes with the carbonate. Order: ethanol < phenol < ethanoic acid. The carbonate is the discriminating test - only a carboxylic acid fizzes, which is exactly how you tell phenol from an acid.

    Explore

    Phenol reaction lab

    Classify phenol reactions by the role of the aromatic OH group.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    phenol 苯酚 běn fēn
    benzene běn
    phenylamine 苯胺 běn àn
    diazonium salt 重氮盐 zhòng dàn yán
    azo compound 偶氮化合物 ǒu dàn huà hé wù
    nitration 硝化 xiāo huà
    bromination 溴化 xiù huà
    acidity 酸性 suān xìng
    delocalised 离域 lí yù
    32.2

    Exam tips

    • Phenol is a stronger acid than alcohols (its anion is stabilised by delocalisation) but weaker than carboxylic acids — it does not react with carbonates.
    • Phenol decolourises bromine water and gives a white precipitate without a catalyst (the ring is activated by oxygen).
    • Acyl chlorides react with alcohols/phenols to give esters readily (better than the reversible acid route); misty HCl fumes are the observation.
  • 33 Carboxylic acids and derivatives
    33.1

    Carboxylic acids

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reaction by which benzoic acid can be produced: (a) reaction of an alkylbenzene with hot alkaline $\text{KMnO}_4$ and then dilute acid, exemplified by methylbenzene
    2. describe the reaction of carboxylic acids with $\text{PCl}_3$ and heat, $\text{PCl}_5$ or $\text{SOCl}_2$ to form acyl chlorides
    3. recognise that some carboxylic acids can be further oxidised: (a) the oxidation of methanoic acid, $\text{HCOOH}$, with Fehling’s reagent or Tollens’ reagent or acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ or acidified $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$ to carbon dioxide and water (b) the oxidation of ethanedioic acid, $\text{HOOCCOOH}$, with warm acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ to carbon dioxide
    4. describe and explain the relative acidities of carboxylic acids, phenols and alcohols
    5. describe and explain the relative acidities of chlorine-substituted carboxylic acids

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Whole and halved lemons
    Citrus fruits taste sour because they contain citric acid, a carboxylic acid

    Making and reacting

    • an alkylbenzene 烷基苯 (such as methylbenzene) is oxidised by hot alkaline $\text{KMnO}_4$, then dilute acid, to give benzoic acid 苯甲酸. The whole side-chain becomes a $\text{–COOH}$ group.
    • a carboxylic acid reacts with $\text{PCl}_3$ and heat, $\text{PCl}_5$, or $\text{SOCl}_2$ to form an acyl chloride 酰氯.
    Hot KMnO4 oxidises a methyl side-chain on a ring to a COOH group, giving benzoic acid
    Hot KMnO4 oxidises a methyl side-chain to a COOH group

    Acids that can be oxidised further

    Two carboxylic acids 羧酸 are special because they can still be oxidised:

    • methanoic acid ($\text{HCOOH}$) is oxidised by Fehling's or Tollens' reagent, or acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ / $\text{K}_2\text{Cr}_2\text{O}_7$, to carbon dioxide and water.
    • ethanedioic acid ($\text{HOOCCOOH}$) is oxidised by warm acidified $\text{KMnO}_4$ to carbon dioxide.

    Relative acidities

    The acidity 酸性 order is:

    $$\text{alcohol} < \text{phenol} < \text{carboxylic acid}$$

    A carboxylic acid is the strongest because, when it loses $\text{H}^+$, the negative charge is spread over two oxygen atoms, making the ion very stable. In a phenol 苯酚 the charge spreads only into the ring, and in an alcohol (giving $\text{RO}^-$) it is not spread at all.

    A three-tier scale from alcohol at the bottom to phenol to carboxylic acid at the top, each showing how widely its anion spreads the negative charge
    Acidity rises from alcohol to phenol to carboxylic acid: the more the negative charge on the conjugate base is spread out, the more stable the ion and the stronger the acid

    Chlorine atoms make a carboxylic acid more acidic. Chlorine is electron-withdrawing 吸电子: through the inductive effect 诱导效应 it pulls electron density away, helping to spread the negative charge and stabilise the ion. So more chlorine atoms (closer to the $\text{–COOH}$) give a stronger acid.

    Explore

    Carboxylic acid A2 map

    Follow carboxylic acids through acyl derivatives and salts.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    alkylbenzene 烷基苯 wán jī běn
    benzoic acid 苯甲酸 běn jiǎ suān
    acyl chloride 酰氯 xiān lǜ
    carboxylic acid 羧酸 suō suān
    acidity 酸性 suān xìng
    phenol 苯酚 běn fēn
    alcohol chún
    electron-withdrawing 吸电子 xī diàn zi
    inductive effect 诱导效应 yòu dǎo xiào yìng
    33.2

    Esters

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reaction by which esters can be produced: (a) reaction of alcohols with acyl chlorides using the formation of ethyl ethanoate and phenyl benzoate as examples

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An alcohol (or phenol) reacts with an acyl chloride at room temperature to give an ester and $\text{HCl}$. Examples are ethyl ethanoate (from ethanol) and phenyl benzoate (from phenol).

    A bottle of aspirin tablets
    Aspirin is an ester, made from salicylic acid
    Explore

    Ester A2 reaction map

    Compare ester formation, hydrolysis and transesterification routes.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    ester zhǐ
    33.3

    Acyl chlorides

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions (reagents and conditions) by which acyl chlorides can be produced: (a) reaction of carboxylic acids with $\text{PCl}_3$ and heat, $\text{PCl}_5$ or $\text{SOCl}_2$
    2. describe the following reactions of acyl chlorides: (a) hydrolysis on addition of water at room temperature to give the carboxylic acid and $\text{HCl}$ (b) reaction with an alcohol at room temperature to produce an ester and $\text{HCl}$ (c) reaction with phenol at room temperature to produce an ester and $\text{HCl}$ (d) reaction with ammonia at room temperature to produce an amide and $\text{HCl}$ (e) reaction with a primary or secondary amine at room temperature to produce an amide and $\text{HCl}$
    3. describe the addition–elimination mechanism of acyl chlorides in reactions in 33.3.2(a)–(e)
    4. explain the relative ease of hydrolysis of acyl chlorides, alkyl chlorides and halogenoarenes (aryl chlorides)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Acyl chlorides are made from carboxylic acids (with $\text{PCl}_3$, $\text{PCl}_5$ or $\text{SOCl}_2$). They are very reactive. At room temperature they react with:

    Reactant Product (plus $\text{HCl}$)
    water the carboxylic acid
    an alcohol an ester
    phenol an ester
    ammonia an amide 酰胺
    a primary or secondary amine an amide
    Acyl chloride at the centre with arrows to its products with water, an alcohol, phenol, ammonia and an amine
    Acyl chlorides are very reactive: with water, an alcohol, phenol, ammonia or an amine they give the labelled product plus HCl

    The addition–elimination mechanism

    All these reactions follow an addition–elimination 加成消去 mechanism: a nucleophile first adds to the slightly positive carbonyl carbon, then $\text{HCl}$ is eliminated.

    The acyl chloride mechanism: a nucleophile adding to the carbonyl carbon to give a tetrahedral intermediate, which then loses chloride as HCl
    Addition–elimination: the nucleophile adds to the $\delta+$ carbonyl carbon, then the C=O reforms and Cl$^-$ leaves as HCl

    Ease of hydrolysis

    Compare how easily three chlorides react with water (hydrolysis 水解):

    $$\text{acyl chloride} \gg \text{alkyl chloride} \gg \text{aryl chloride}$$

    An acyl chloride reacts violently with cold water; an alkyl chloride reacts slowly; an aryl chloride (halogenoarene) does not react, because its C–Cl bond is strengthened by the ring.

    Worked example. Ethanoyl chloride reacts violently with cold water, while ethyl ethanoate needs prolonged reflux with acid or alkali. Explain the difference. Both are attacked at the carbonyl carbon, so compare how open that carbon is to attack and how good the leaving group is. In ethanoyl chloride the chlorine is strongly electronegative and withdraws electrons, making the carbonyl carbon much more $\delta+$ and so far more open to a nucleophile; and $\text{Cl}^{-}$, the anion of a strong acid, is a good leaving group. In the ester the $\text{–OR}$ oxygen donates a lone pair into the carbonyl, reducing that $\delta+$ charge, and $\text{RO}^{-}$ is a poor leaving group. So the acyl chloride hydrolyses far more easily. Argue from both the $\delta+$ on the carbon and the leaving group: either one alone is usually only half the marks.

    Explore

    Acyl chloride reaction map

    Follow why acyl chlorides are reactive acylating agents.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    ammonia ān
    amide 酰胺 xiān àn
    amine àn
    addition–elimination 加成消去 jiā chéng xiāo qù
    hydrolysis 水解 shuǐ jiě
    33.3

    Exam tips

    • Acyl chlorides are very reactive — learn their products with water (HCl), alcohols (esters), ammonia (amides) and amines.
    • Reactivity order of derivatives: acyl chloride > ester > amide.
    • Acid strength: electron-withdrawing groups (e.g. Cl) increase it — explain via the carboxylate ion.
  • 34 Nitrogen compounds
    34.1

    Primary and secondary amines

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions (reagents and conditions) by which primary and secondary amines are produced: (a) reaction of halogenoalkanes with $\text{NH}_3$ in ethanol heated under pressure (b) reaction of halogenoalkanes with primary amines in ethanol, heated in a sealed tube/under pressure (c) the reduction of amides with $\text{LiAlH}_4$ (d) the reduction of nitriles with $\text{LiAlH}_4$ or $\text{H}_2/\text{Ni}$
    2. describe the condensation reaction of ammonia or an amine with an acyl chloride at room temperature to give an amide
    3. describe and explain the basicity of aqueous solutions of amines

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An amine has an $\text{–NH}_2$ (primary) or $\text{–NH}$ (secondary) group.

    A primary amine has -NH2; a secondary amine has -NH between two carbons
    A primary amine has -NH2; a secondary amine has -NH-

    Making amines

    • a halogenoalkane 卤代烷 with $\text{NH}_3$ in ethanol, heated under pressure → a primary amine.
    • a halogenoalkane with a primary amine, heated under pressure → a secondary amine.
    • reduction 还原 of an amide 酰胺 with $\text{LiAlH}_4$.
    • reduction of a nitrile with $\text{LiAlH}_4$ or $\text{H}_2/\text{Ni}$.
    Two routes: a halogenoalkane with ammonia, or reducing a nitrile
    Two routes to an amine: from a halogenoalkane, or by reducing a nitrile

    An amine (or ammonia) reacts with an acyl chloride in a condensation 缩合 reaction to give an amide. The reagent is an acyl chloride 酰氯.

    Basicity of amines

    The basicity 碱性 of an amine comes from the lone pair on its nitrogen, which can accept an $\text{H}^+$ from water.

    Explore

    Amine type lab

    Classify amines by substitution at nitrogen and basic behaviour.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    amine àn
    halogenoalkane 卤代烷 lǔ dài wán
    reduction 还原 huán yuán
    amide 酰胺 xiān àn
    nitrile jīng
    ammonia ān
    condensation 缩合 suō hé
    acyl chloride 酰氯 xiān lǜ
    basicity 碱性 jiǎn xìng
    34.2

    Phenylamine and azo compounds

    Syllabus
    1. describe the preparation of phenylamine via the nitration of benzene to form nitrobenzene followed by reduction with hot Sn/concentrated $\text{HCl}$ followed by $\text{NaOH(aq)}$
    2. describe: (a) the reaction of phenylamine with $\text{Br}_2\text{(aq)}$ at room temperature (b) the reaction of phenylamine with $\text{HNO}_2$ or $\text{NaNO}_2$ and dilute acid below $10\text{ }^\circ\text{C}$ to produce the diazonium salt; further warming of the diazonium salt with $\text{H}_2\text{O}$ to give phenol
    3. describe and explain the relative basicities of aqueous ammonia, ethylamine and phenylamine
    4. recall the following about azo compounds: (a) describe the coupling of benzenediazonium chloride with phenol in $\text{NaOH(aq)}$ to form an azo compound (b) identify the azo group (c) state that azo compounds are often used as dyes (d) that other azo dyes can be formed via a similar route

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Making phenylamine

    Make phenylamine 苯胺 from benzene in two steps: nitrate benzene to nitrobenzene, then reduce it with hot $\text{Sn}$ and concentrated $\text{HCl}$, followed by $\text{NaOH(aq)}$.

    Reactions

    • with bromine water at room temperature → 2,4,6-tribromophenylamine (a white precipitate). The ring is activated, like phenol.
    • with $\text{HNO}_2$ (from $\text{NaNO}_2$ and dilute acid) below $10\,°\text{C}$ → a diazonium salt; warming this with water gives phenol.

    Relative basicity

    $$\text{phenylamine} < \text{ammonia} < \text{ethylamine}$$

    Ethylamine is the strongest base: its alkyl group pushes electron density onto the nitrogen, making the lone pair more available. Phenylamine is the weakest, because its lone pair is delocalised 离域 into the benzene ring, so it is less available to accept an $\text{H}^+$.

    Phenylamine, ammonia and ethylamine along a basicity scale, with the ring pulling the lone pair away in phenylamine and the alkyl group pushing electrons in ethylamine
    Basicity depends on the nitrogen lone pair: an alkyl group makes it more available (ethylamine strongest), a benzene ring pulls it away (phenylamine weakest)

    Azo compounds

    A diazonium salt 重氮盐 (benzenediazonium chloride) couples with phenol 苯酚 in $\text{NaOH(aq)}$ to form an azo compound 偶氮化合物. The azo group is $\text{–N=N–}$. Azo compounds are brightly coloured and are often used as dye 染料s; many other azo dyes are made the same way.

    A small pile of bright orange methyl orange dye powder on a pale background
    Methyl orange, a bright orange azo dye; the strong colour comes from the $\text{–N=N–}$ azo group, which is why azo compounds are so widely used as dyes

    Worked example. An amino acid has an isoelectric point of pH 6.0. Give its charge, and the electrode it moves towards in electrophoresis, at pH 2, at pH 6.0 and at pH 11. Compare the solution's pH with the isoelectric point each time. At pH 2, well below it, the solution is acidic, so the $\text{–NH}_2$ gains an $\text{H}^{+}$: the amino acid is positive and moves to the cathode (negative electrode). At pH 6.0, exactly its isoelectric point, it is the zwitterion with no net charge, so it does not move. At pH 11, well above it, the $\text{–COOH}$ loses its $\text{H}^{+}$: the amino acid is negative and moves to the anode. Compare the pH with the isoelectric point, never with 7 - and note the zwitterion still carries both charges, it simply has no net charge.

    Explore

    Phenylamine to azo dye route

    Follow phenylamine from diazotisation to coloured azo compound.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    phenylamine 苯胺 běn àn
    delocalised 离域 lí yù
    diazonium salt 重氮盐 zhòng dàn yán
    phenol 苯酚 běn fēn
    azo compound 偶氮化合物 ǒu dàn huà hé wù
    dye 染料 rǎn liào
    34.3

    Amides

    Syllabus
    1. recall the reactions (reagents and conditions) by which amides are produced: (a) the reaction between ammonia and an acyl chloride at room temperature (b) the reaction between a primary amine and an acyl chloride at room temperature
    2. describe the reactions of amides: (a) hydrolysis with aqueous alkali or aqueous acid (b) the reduction of the CO group in amides with $\text{LiAlH}_4$ to form an amine
    3. state and explain why amides are much weaker bases than amines

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An amide is made from ammonia or a primary amine with an acyl chloride at room temperature.

    A bottle of paracetamol tablets
    Paracetamol is a common painkiller that contains the amide group (–CONH–)

    Its reactions:

    • hydrolysis with aqueous acid or alkali, giving the carboxylic acid (or its salt) and the amine (or ammonium).
    • reduction of the C=O group with $\text{LiAlH}_4$ to give an amine.

    An amide is a much weaker base than an amine, because the nitrogen lone pair is delocalised onto the neighbouring C=O group, so it is not available to accept an $\text{H}^+$.

    Explore

    Amide formation route

    Follow acyl chloride or acid derivative to an amide.

    34.4

    Amino acids

    Syllabus
    1. describe the acid/base properties of amino acids and the formation of zwitterions, to include the isoelectric point
    2. describe the formation of amide (peptide) bonds between amino acids to give di- and tripeptides
    3. interpret and predict the results of electrophoresis on mixtures of amino acids and dipeptides at varying pHs (the assembling of the apparatus will not be tested)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An amino acid 氨基酸 has both a basic $\text{–NH}_2$ group and an acidic $\text{–COOH}$ group.

    Zwitterions and the isoelectric point

    The $\text{–COOH}$ can give its $\text{H}^+$ to the $\text{–NH}_2$ in the same molecule, forming a zwitterion 两性离子 ($\text{H}_3\text{N}^+\text{–CHR–COO}^-$) — an ion with both a positive and a negative end but no overall charge.

    • in acid (low pH), the amino acid gains $\text{H}^+$ and becomes positive.
    • in alkali (high pH), it loses $\text{H}^+$ and becomes negative.
    • at one special pH, the isoelectric point 等电点, it is mostly the zwitterion with no net charge.
    An amino acid drawn three ways: positively charged in acid, a neutral zwitterion at the isoelectric point, and negatively charged in alkali
    An amino acid's charge depends on pH: positive in acid, the neutral zwitterion at the isoelectric point, negative in alkali

    Peptide bonds

    Two amino acids join in a condensation reaction: the $\text{–COOH}$ of one and the $\text{–NH}_2$ of the other react, losing water and forming a peptide bond 肽键 (an amide link). Two amino acids give a dipeptide 二肽, three give a tripeptide.

    Two amino acids condensing: the OH from one carboxyl and the H from the other amino group leave as water, forming a peptide bond
    Two amino acids condense: the –OH from one –COOH and the –H from the other –NH$_2$ leave as water, forming the peptide (amide) bond

    Electrophoresis

    In electrophoresis 电泳, a mixture is placed in an electric field at a chosen pH:

    • above its isoelectric point, an amino acid is negative and moves to the positive electrode.
    • below its isoelectric point, it is positive and moves to the negative electrode.
    • at its isoelectric point, it does not move. So different amino acids separate.
    A gel strip with a negative and a positive electrode: a positive amino acid moves towards the negative electrode, a negative one towards the positive, and a neutral one stays put
    Electrophoresis at a chosen pH: a positive amino acid moves to the negative electrode, a negative one to the positive, and a neutral one stays — so they separate
    Explore

    Amino acid lab

    Classify amino acid behaviour by the group that reacts.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    amino acid 氨基酸 ān jī suān
    zwitterion 两性离子 liǎng xìng lí zi
    isoelectric point 等电点 děng diàn diǎn
    peptide bond 肽键 tài jiàn
    dipeptide 二肽 èr tài
    electrophoresis 电泳 diàn yǒng
    34.4

    Exam tips

    • Phenylamine is a weaker base than aliphatic amines because the N lone pair delocalises into the ring.
    • Diazotisation ($\text{NaNO}_2$/HCl, below $10\ ^\circ\text{C}$) then coupling gives azo dyes — learn the conditions and the coloured product.
    • Amino acids are zwitterions (both $-\text{NH}_2$ and $-\text{COOH}$), so they are amphoteric; describe behaviour either side of the isoelectric point.
  • 35 Polymerisation
    35.1

    Condensation polymerisation

    Syllabus
    1. describe the formation of polyesters: (a) the reaction between a diol and a dicarboxylic acid or dioyl chloride (b) the reaction of a hydroxycarboxylic acid
    2. describe the formation of polyamides: (a) the reaction between a diamine and a dicarboxylic acid or dioyl chloride (b) the reaction of an aminocarboxylic acid (c) the reaction between amino acids
    3. deduce the repeat unit of a condensation polymer obtained from a given monomer or pair of monomers
    4. identify the monomer(s) present in a given section of a condensation polymer molecule

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    In condensation polymerisation 缩合聚合, monomers join into a long chain and a small molecule (such as water or $\text{HCl}$) is lost each time a new bond forms. Each monomer needs two reactive groups, so the chain can grow at both ends.

    A carboxyl group joining a hydroxyl to form an ester link and a carboxyl joining an amine to form an amide link, each releasing a water molecule
    Condensation links: a polyester forms ester links and a polyamide forms amide links; each new link releases a small molecule (here water)

    Polyesters

    A polyester 聚酯 has many ester links along its chain. You can make one from:

    • a diol 二醇 (two $\text{–OH}$ groups) and a dicarboxylic acid 二羧酸 (two $\text{–COOH}$ groups), or a dioyl chloride.
    • a single hydroxycarboxylic acid, which has both an $\text{–OH}$ and a $\text{–COOH}$.
    A bale of crushed clear plastic drinks bottles
    PET drinks bottles are made of a polyester — a condensation polymer, collected here for recycling

    Polyamides

    A polyamide 聚酰胺 has many amide links. You can make one from:

    • a diamine 二胺 (two $\text{–NH}_2$ groups) and a dicarboxylic acid or a dioyl chloride.
    • a single aminocarboxylic acid, or from amino acids 氨基酸 joining together (proteins are natural polyamides).
    A pink strand of nylon being pulled up out of a beaker, forming a continuous thread at the surface of the liquid
    The "nylon rope trick": nylon (a polyamide) forms where two reactant solutions meet, so a single long thread can be pulled out (it is pink here from an added indicator)

    Repeat units and monomers

    The repeat unit 重复单元 of a condensation polymer contains parts of both monomers, minus the atoms lost as the small molecule. To find the monomers 单体 from a section of polymer, break the chain at each ester or amide link, then add back $\text{–OH}$ and $\text{–H}$ (or $\text{–Cl}$).

    A polyester chain broken at its ester links and the cut ends given back -OH and -H, to recover the diol and the dicarboxylic acid monomers
    To find the monomers, break the chain at each link and add back –OH and –H to the cut ends — here giving the diol and the dicarboxylic acid

    Worked example. A polymer chain contains repeating $\text{–CONH–}$ links. Name the type of polymer, identify the monomers, and give the small molecule lost. A $\text{–CONH–}$ link is an amide, so this is a polyamide made by condensation polymerisation. To find the monomers, break the chain at each amide link and give the cut ends their atoms back: the carbon side takes $\text{–OH}$, making a dicarboxylic acid, and the nitrogen side takes $\text{–H}$, making a diamine. The small molecule lost at each link is water (or $\text{HCl}$, if an acyl dichloride was used in place of the acid). Each monomer must have two functional groups, or the chain could never keep growing - if the monomer you propose has only one, you have broken the chain in the wrong place.

    Explore

    Condensation polymer route

    Watch monomers join while a small molecule leaves each time.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    condensation polymerisation 缩合聚合 suō hé jù hé
    polyester 聚酯 jù zhǐ
    diol 二醇 èr chún
    dicarboxylic acid 二羧酸 èr suō suān
    polyamide 聚酰胺 jù xiān àn
    diamine 二胺 èr àn
    amino acid 氨基酸 ān jī suān
    repeat unit 重复单元 chóng fù dān yuán
    monomer 单体 dān tǐ
    35.2

    Predicting the type of polymerisation

    Syllabus
    1. predict the type of polymerisation reaction for a given monomer or pair of monomers
    2. deduce the type of polymerisation reaction which produces a given section of a polymer molecule

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Clue Type
    the monomer has a C=C double bond, and nothing else is lost addition polymerisation 加成聚合
    each monomer has two functional groups, and a small molecule is lost; the chain has ester or amide links condensation polymerisation
    Two panels comparing addition polymerisation, where a C=C opens and nothing is lost, with condensation polymerisation, where two-group monomers join and a small molecule is lost
    The two kinds of polymerisation: addition opens a C=C and loses nothing; condensation joins two-group monomers and loses a small molecule
    Explore

    Polymerisation type lab

    Classify monomers by whether they form addition or condensation polymers.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    addition polymerisation 加成聚合 jiā chéng jù hé
    35.3

    Degradable polymers

    Syllabus
    1. recognise that poly(alkenes) are chemically inert and can therefore be difficult to biodegrade
    2. recognise that some polymers can be degraded by the action of light
    3. recognise that polyesters and polyamides are biodegradable by acidic and alkaline hydrolysis

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    • poly(alkene)s 聚烯烃 are chemically inert — they have only strong, non-polar C–C and C–H bonds, so they are hard to biodegrade 可生物降解 and last a long time.
    • some polymers are made so that light can break them down (they are photodegradable).
    • polyesters and polyamides are biodegradable, because their ester and amide links can be broken by acidic or alkaline hydrolysis 水解.
    Explore

    Degradable polymer route

    Follow how polymer structure controls breakdown.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    poly(alkene) 聚烯烃 jù xī tīng
    biodegradable 可生物降解 kě shēng wù jiàng jiě
    hydrolysis 水解 shuǐ jiě
    35.3

    Exam tips

    • Condensation polymers (polyesters, polyamides) form with loss of a small molecule ($\text{H}_2\text{O}$ or HCl) — draw the repeat unit and the lost molecule.
    • Identify the monomers from the polymer by breaking the ester or amide link — a common question.
    • Predict the type from the monomers: a $\text{C}=\text{C}$ gives addition; two functional groups give condensation.
    • Polyesters and polyamides are hydrolysable (more degradable); addition polymers are not.
  • 36 Organic synthesis
    36.1

    Organic synthesis

    Syllabus
    1. for an organic molecule containing several functional groups: (a) identify organic functional groups using the reactions in the syllabus (b) predict properties and reactions
    2. devise multi-step synthetic routes for preparing organic molecules using the reactions in the syllabus
    3. analyse a given synthetic route in terms of type of reaction and reagents used for each step of it, and possible by-products

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Like the AS synthesis topic, this asks you to join up known reactions to build a target molecule. Now you also have the A Level reactions of arenes, phenol, amines, amides and acyl chlorides.

    Identifying functional groups

    A molecule may carry several functional group 官能团 types. Use the test reactions to spot each one, then predict its behaviour. For example:

    • decolourises bromine water with no catalyst, giving a white precipitate → a phenol or a phenylamine (the ring is activated).
    • reacts violently with cold water, giving fumes of $\text{HCl}$ → an acyl chloride 酰氯.
    • gives a purple colour with neutral $\text{FeCl}_3$ → a phenol 苯酚.
    A three-column table of A Level tests: bromine water with no catalyst, cold water, and neutral iron(III) chloride, with the observation and functional group for each
    Identification tests added at A Level: each reagent gives a characteristic result that points to a functional group

    A map of the A Level reactions

    Start Reagent and conditions Product
    benzene (an arene 芳烃) $\text{HNO}_3$ / $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ (electrophilic substitution 亲电取代) nitrobenzene
    nitrobenzene $\text{Sn}$ / conc $\text{HCl}$, then $\text{NaOH}$ (reduction 还原) phenylamine
    phenylamine $\text{HNO}_2$, below $10\,°\text{C}$ a diazonium salt
    diazonium salt warm water phenol; or couple with phenol → azo dye
    methylbenzene hot $\text{KMnO}_4$ (oxidation 氧化) benzoic acid
    carboxylic acid 羧酸 $\text{SOCl}_2$ or $\text{PCl}_5$ acyl chloride
    acyl chloride alcohol / phenol an ester
    acyl chloride ammonia / amine an amide 酰胺
    amide or nitrile $\text{LiAlH}_4$ an amine
    halogenoalkane $\text{KCN}$ a nitrile (adds one carbon)
    A network of A Level reactions: benzene to nitrobenzene to phenylamine to a diazonium salt to phenol or an azo dye, and a carboxylic acid to an acyl chloride to esters and amides
    A map of the A Level reactions: the aromatic chain (top) and the acyl-chloride chain (bottom), with their feed-ins. Work backwards from your target

    Planning and analysing a route

    To devise a synthetic route 合成路线, work backwards from the target: which single reaction makes it, and from what? Repeat until you reach the starting material, then write each step with its reagent 试剂 and conditions.

    A synthesis chain from benzene to an azo dye, with the reagent on each forward step, and a large backward arrow above showing that the planning runs from the target back to the start
    Plan a route by working backwards from the target, one reaction at a time, until you reach the starting material

    When you analyse a route, state the type of reaction for each step (for example electrophilic substitution, addition–elimination 加成消去, oxidation or reduction) and watch for likely by-products 副产物 — for example, making an amine from a halogenoalkane also gives over-substituted amines, lowering the yield.

    Worked example. Devise a route from benzene to phenylamine, $\text{C}_6\text{H}_5\text{NH}_2$. Work backwards: phenylamine comes from reducing nitrobenzene, and nitrobenzene comes from nitrating benzene - so the route is two steps. Step 1: benzene with concentrated $\text{HNO}_3$ and concentrated $\text{H}_2\text{SO}_4$ at $55\ °\text{C}$; electrophilic substitution gives nitrobenzene (keep below $55\ °\text{C}$, or further substitution follows). Step 2: reduce the nitrobenzene with tin and concentrated $\text{HCl}$, then add $\text{NaOH}$ to free the amine from its salt. There is no direct route - you cannot put an $\text{–NH}_2$ straight onto a ring, which is exactly why this nitrate-then-reduce pair is worth knowing by heart.

    Explore

    A-Level synthesis planner

    Build a route by matching functional-group changes to reagents.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    functional group 官能团 guān néng tuán
    acyl chloride 酰氯 xiān lǜ
    phenol 苯酚 běn fēn
    arene 芳烃 fāng tīng
    electrophilic substitution 亲电取代 qīn diàn qǔ dài
    reduction 还原 huán yuán
    oxidation 氧化 yǎng huà
    carboxylic acid 羧酸 suō suān
    ester zhǐ
    amine àn
    amide 酰胺 xiān àn
    nitrile jīng
    synthetic route 合成路线 hé chéng lù xiàn
    reagent 试剂 shì jì
    addition–elimination 加成消去 jiā chéng xiāo qù
    by-product 副产物 fù chǎn wù
    36.1

    Exam tips

    • Combine AS and A-level steps and watch for benzene-ring reactions and carbon-count changes.
    • State every reagent and condition, and note when a step produces a racemic mixture.
    • Choose the shortest route that reaches the target functional group.
  • 37 Analytical techniques
    37.1

    Thin-layer chromatography

    Syllabus
    1. describe and understand the terms (a) stationary phase, for example aluminium oxide (on a solid support) (b) mobile phase; a polar or non-polar solvent (c) $R_{\text{f}}$ value (d) solvent front and baseline
    2. interpret $R_{\text{f}}$ values
    3. explain the differences in $R_{\text{f}}$ values in terms of interaction with the stationary phase and of relative solubility in the mobile phase

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Chromatography 色谱 separates a mixture using two "phases" — one that stays still and one that moves. In thin-layer chromatography 薄层色谱 (TLC):

    • the stationary phase 固定相 stays still (for example aluminium oxide on a plate).
    • the mobile phase 流动相 moves (a polar or non-polar solvent that travels up the plate).
    • the baseline 基线 is the starting line where the spots are placed; the solvent front 溶剂前沿 is the highest level the solvent reaches.

    The $R_{\text{f}}$ value compares how far a spot moves with how far the solvent moves:

    $$R_{\text{f}} = \frac{\text{distance moved by the spot}}{\text{distance moved by the solvent front}}$$

    It is always between 0 and 1. A substance that sticks more strongly to the stationary phase, or is less soluble in the mobile phase, moves less and has a smaller $R_{\text{f}}$.

    A TLC plate with a baseline, a solvent front, and a spot that has moved partway up, with the spot and solvent distances marked
    Thin-layer chromatography: the $R_\text{f}$ value is how far the spot moved divided by how far the solvent front moved
    A developed TLC plate glowing under ultraviolet light
    A real TLC plate under UV light: each glowing spot is a separated component of the mixture
    Explore

    TLC route

    Follow a spot up a plate and use Rf to identify substances.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    chromatography 色谱 sè pǔ
    thin-layer chromatography 薄层色谱 báo céng sè pǔ
    stationary phase 固定相 gù dìng xiāng
    mobile phase 流动相 liú dòng xiāng
    baseline 基线 jī xiàn
    solvent front 溶剂前沿 róng jì qián yán
    37.2

    Gas/liquid chromatography

    Syllabus
    1. describe and understand the terms (a) stationary phase; a high boiling point non-polar liquid (on a solid support) (b) mobile phase; an unreactive gas (c) retention time
    2. interpret gas/liquid chromatograms in terms of the percentage composition of a mixture
    3. explain retention times in terms of interaction with the stationary phase

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    In gas/liquid chromatography 气液色谱 (GLC):

    • the stationary phase is a high-boiling-point non-polar liquid on a solid support.
    • the mobile phase is an unreactive carrier gas.
    • the retention time 保留时间 is how long a component takes to pass through.

    The area of each peak gives the percentage of that component in the mixture. A component that interacts more with the stationary phase has a longer retention time.

    A chromatogram with three peaks at different retention times, the peak area giving the percentage of each component
    A gas–liquid chromatogram: each component gives a peak at its own retention time, and the peak area is its percentage in the mixture
    Explore

    Gas/liquid chromatography route

    Follow a volatile sample through column separation to a chromatogram.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    gas/liquid chromatography 气液色谱 qì yè sè pǔ
    retention time 保留时间 bǎo liú shí jiān
    37.3

    Carbon-13 NMR spectroscopy

    Syllabus
    1. analyse and interpret a carbon-13 NMR spectrum of a simple molecule to deduce: (a) the different environments of the carbon atoms present (b) the possible structures for the molecule
    2. predict or explain the number of peaks in a carbon-13 NMR spectrum for a given molecule

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    NMR 核磁共振 (nuclear magnetic resonance) studies how certain nuclei behave in a strong magnetic field.

    A tall cylindrical NMR spectrometer standing in a laboratory, marked with a strong magnetic field warning
    An NMR spectrometer: the large cylinder holds a superconducting magnet that makes the very strong magnetic field the technique needs

    In carbon-13 NMR, each different chemical environment 化学环境 of carbon gives one peak. So:

    • the number of peaks tells you how many different carbon environments there are (equivalent carbons share a peak).
    • the position of each peak (its chemical shift) suggests the type of carbon, which helps you deduce possible structures.
    Explore

    Carbon-13 NMR lab

    Match carbon environments to C-13 NMR evidence.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    NMR 核磁共振 hé cí gòng zhèn
    chemical environment 化学环境 huà xué huán jìng
    37.4

    Proton (¹H) NMR spectroscopy

    Syllabus
    1. analyse and interpret a proton ($^1\text{H}$) NMR spectrum of a simple molecule to deduce: (a) the different environments of proton present using chemical shift values (b) the relative numbers of each type of proton present from relative peak areas (c) the number of equivalent protons on the carbon atom adjacent to the one to which the given proton is attached from the splitting pattern, using the $n + 1$ rule (limited to singlet, doublet, triplet, quartet and multiplet) (d) the possible structures for the molecule
    2. predict the chemical shifts and splitting patterns of the protons in a given molecule
    3. describe the use of tetramethylsilane, TMS, as the standard for chemical shift measurements
    4. state the need for deuterated solvents, e.g. $\text{CDCl}_3$, when obtaining a proton NMR spectrum
    5. describe the identification of O–H and N–H protons by proton exchange using $\text{D}_2\text{O}$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Proton NMR looks at the hydrogen atoms (proton 质子 nuclei). From the spectrum you read off:

    • chemical environments: protons in different environments appear at different chemical shift 化学位移 values.
    • relative numbers: the relative peak areas give the ratio of each type of proton.
    • splitting 裂分: a peak is split by the protons on the neighbouring carbon, following the $n+1$ rule$n$ equivalent neighbours split a peak into $n+1$ lines:
    Neighbours ($n$) Pattern
    0 singlet 单峰
    1 doublet 双峰
    2 triplet 三峰
    3 quartet 四峰
    many multiplet 多重峰
    Four NMR peak patterns: a single line, two lines, three lines and four lines, labelled singlet, doublet, triplet and quartet
    The $n+1$ rule: $n$ equivalent neighbouring protons split a peak into $n+1$ lines (singlet, doublet, triplet, quartet)
    A proton NMR spectrum of ethanol with three groups of peaks: a CH3 triplet, a CH2 quartet and an OH singlet, plus the TMS reference at zero
    Proton NMR of ethanol: three environments give a CH$_3$ triplet, a CH$_2$ quartet and an OH singlet, with areas in the ratio $3:2:1$

    Practical points

    • tetramethylsilane 四甲基硅烷 (TMS) is the standard, set at a chemical shift of $0$.
    • a deuterated solvent 氘代溶剂 (such as $\text{CDCl}_3$) is used so that the solvent itself gives no proton signal.
    • shaking the sample with $\text{D}_2\text{O}$ makes the O–H and N–H peaks disappear (their hydrogen is swapped for deuterium), which identifies those protons.

    Worked example. A compound $\text{C}_4\text{H}_8\text{O}_2$ gives three proton NMR peaks: a triplet at $\delta\ 1.2$ (area 3), a quartet at $\delta\ 4.1$ (area 2), and a singlet at $\delta\ 2.0$ (area 3). Deduce the structure. Read the areas first, then the splitting. Areas $3:2:3$ give three proton environments holding 3, 2 and 3 hydrogens. Apply the $n+1$ rule in reverse: a triplet (area 3) is a $\text{CH}_3$ with 2 neighbours, and a quartet (area 2) is a $\text{CH}_2$ with 3 neighbours - each splitting the other, which is the classic ethyl group, $\text{CH}_3\text{CH}_2-$. That $\text{CH}_2$ lies far downfield at $\delta\ 4.1$, so it is attached to an oxygen. The remaining singlet (area 3) is a $\text{CH}_3$ with no neighbours at $\delta\ 2.0$, so it sits next to the C=O. Together: $\text{CH}_3\text{COOCH}_2\text{CH}_3$, ethyl ethanoate. A triplet-and-quartet pair is almost always an ethyl group - spot it first and the rest follows.

    Explore

    Proton NMR lab

    Match proton evidence to chemical environment and neighbours.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    proton 质子 zhì zi
    chemical shift 化学位移 huà xué wèi yí
    splitting 裂分 liè fēn
    singlet 单峰 dān fēng
    doublet 双峰 shuāng fēng
    triplet 三峰 sān fēng
    quartet 四峰 sì fēng
    multiplet 多重峰 duō zhòng fēng
    tetramethylsilane 四甲基硅烷 sì jiǎ jī guī wán
    deuterated solvent 氘代溶剂 dāo dài róng jì
    37.4

    Exam tips

    • In $^{13}\text{C}$ NMR the number of peaks equals the number of carbon environments — use symmetry to count them.
    • In $^1\text{H}$ NMR use chemical shift (data booklet), integration (ratio of H's) and splitting (the $n+1$ rule): a triplet + quartet means an ethyl group.
    • TMS is the reference ($\delta = 0$); a $\text{D}_2\text{O}$ shake removes O-H and N-H peaks.
    • Combine IR, mass spectrum and NMR to deduce a structure, stating which evidence gives which feature.

Log in or create account

IGCSE & A-Level